Project Configuration

Introduction

ESP-IDF uses kconfiglib which is a Python-based extension to the Kconfig system which provides a compile-time project configuration mechanism. Kconfig is based around options of several types: integer, string, boolean. Kconfig files specify dependencies between options, default values of the options, the way the options are grouped together, etc.

For the complete list of available features please see Kconfig and kconfiglib extentions.

Project Configuration Menu

Application developers can open a terminal-based project configuration menu with the idf.py menuconfig build target.

After being updated, this configuration is saved inside sdkconfig file in the project root directory. Based on sdkconfig, application build targets will generate sdkconfig.h file in the build directory, and will make sdkconfig options available to the project build system and source files.

(For the legacy GNU Make build system, the project configuration menu is opened with make menuconfig.)

Using sdkconfig.defaults

In some cases, such as when sdkconfig file is under revision control, the fact that sdkconfig file gets changed by the build system may be inconvenient. The build system offers a way to avoid this, in the form of sdkconfig.defaults file. This file is never touched by the build system, and must be created manually. It can contain all the options which matter for the given application. The format is the same as that of the sdkconfig file. Once sdkconfig.defaults is created, sdkconfig can be deleted and added to the ignore list of the revision control system (e.g. .gitignore file for git). Project build targets will automatically create sdkconfig file, populated with the settings from sdkconfig.defaults file, and the rest of the settings will be set to their default values. Note that the build process will not override settings that are already in sdkconfig by ones from sdkconfig.defaults. For more information, see 自定义 sdkconfig 的默认值.

Kconfig Formatting Rules

The following attributes of Kconfig files are standardized:

  • Within any menu, option names should have a consistent prefix. The prefix length is currently set to at least 3 characters.

  • The indentation style is 4 characters created by spaces. All sub-items belonging to a parent item are indented by one level deeper. For example, menu is indented by 0 characters, the config inside of the menu by 4 characters, the help of the config by 8 characters and the text of the help by 12 characters.

  • No trailing spaces are allowed at the end of the lines.

  • The maximum length of options is set to 40 characters.

  • The maximum length of lines is set to 120 characters.

  • Lines cannot be wrapped by backslash (because there is a bug in earlier versions of conf-idf which causes that Windows line endings are not recognized after a backslash).

Format checker

tools/check_kconfigs.py is provided for checking the Kconfig formatting rules. The checker checks all Kconfig and Kconfig.projbuild files in the ESP-IDF directory and generates a new file with suffix .new with some recommendations how to fix issues (if there are any). Please note that the checker cannot correct all rules and the responsibility of the developer is to check and make final corrections in order to pass the tests. For example, indentations will be corrected if there isn’t some misleading previous formatting but it cannot come up with a common prefix for options inside a menu.

Backward Compatibility of Kconfig Options

The standard Kconfig tools ignore unknown options in sdkconfig. So if a developer has custom settings for options which are renamed in newer ESP-IDF releases then the given setting for the option would be silently ignored. Therefore, several features have been adopted to avoid this:

  1. confgen.py is used by the tool chain to pre-process sdkconfig files before anything else, for example menuconfig, would read them. As the consequence, the settings for old options will be kept and not ignored.

  2. confgen.py recursively finds all sdkconfig.rename files in ESP-IDF directory which contain old and new Kconfig option names. Old options are replaced by new ones in the sdkconfig file.

  3. confgen.py post-processes sdkconfig files and generates all build outputs (sdkconfig.h, sdkconfig.cmake, auto.conf) by adding a list of compatibility statements, i.e. value of the old option is set the value of the new option (after modification). This is done in order to not break customer codes where old option might still be used.

  4. Deprecated options and their replacements are automatically generated by confgen.py.

Configuration Options Reference

Subsequent sections contain the list of available ESP-IDF options, automatically generated from Kconfig files. Note that depending on the options selected, some options listed here may not be visible by default in the interface of menuconfig.

By convention, all option names are upper case with underscores. When Kconfig generates sdkconfig and sdkconfig.h files, option names are prefixed with CONFIG_. So if an option ENABLE_FOO is defined in a Kconfig file and selected in menuconfig, then sdkconfig and sdkconfig.h files will have CONFIG_ENABLE_FOO defined. In this reference, option names are also prefixed with CONFIG_, same as in the source code.

SDK tool configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SDK_TOOLPREFIX

Compiler toolchain path/prefix

Found in: SDK tool configuration

The prefix/path that is used to call the toolchain. The default setting assumes a crosstool-ng gcc setup that is in your PATH.

Default value:

  • “xtensa-esp32-elf-“

CONFIG_SDK_PYTHON

Python interpreter

Found in: SDK tool configuration

The executable name/path that is used to run python.

(Note: This option is used with the legacy GNU Make build system only.)

Default value:

  • “python”

CONFIG_SDK_MAKE_WARN_UNDEFINED_VARIABLES

‘make’ warns on undefined variables

Found in: SDK tool configuration

Adds –warn-undefined-variables to MAKEFLAGS. This causes make to print a warning any time an undefined variable is referenced.

This option helps find places where a variable reference is misspelled or otherwise missing, but it can be unwanted if you have Makefiles which depend on undefined variables expanding to an empty string.

(Note: this option is used with the legacy GNU Make build system only.)

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SDK_TOOLCHAIN_SUPPORTS_TIME_WIDE_64_BITS

Toolchain supports time_t wide 64-bits

Found in: SDK tool configuration

Enable this option in case you have a custom toolchain which supports time_t wide 64-bits. This option checks time_t is 64-bits and disables ROM time functions to use the time functions from the toolchain instead. This option allows resolving the Y2K38 problem. See “Setup Linux Toolchain from Scratch” to build a custom toolchain which supports 64-bits time_t.

Note: ESP-IDF does not currently come with any pre-compiled toolchain that supports 64-bit wide time_t. This will change in a future major release, but currently 64-bit time_t requires a custom built toolchain.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Build type

Contains:

CONFIG_APP_BUILD_TYPE

Application build type

Found in: Build type

Select the way the application is built.

By default, the application is built as a binary file in a format compatible with the ESP-IDF bootloader. In addition to this application, 2nd stage bootloader is also built. Application and bootloader binaries can be written into flash and loaded/executed from there.

Another option, useful for only very small and limited applications, is to only link the .elf file of the application, such that it can be loaded directly into RAM over JTAG. Note that since IRAM and DRAM sizes are very limited, it is not possible to build any complex application this way. However for kinds of testing and debugging, this option may provide faster iterations, since the application does not need to be written into flash. Note that at the moment, ESP-IDF does not contain all the startup code required to initialize the CPUs and ROM memory (data/bss). Therefore it is necessary to execute a bit of ROM code prior to executing the application. A gdbinit file may look as follows (for ESP32):

# Connect to a running instance of OpenOCD target remote :3333 # Reset and halt the target mon reset halt # Run to a specific point in ROM code, # where most of initialization is complete. thb *0x40007d54 c # Load the application into RAM load # Run till app_main tb app_main c

Execute this gdbinit file as follows:

xtensa-esp32-elf-gdb build/app-name.elf -x gdbinit

Example gdbinit files for other targets can be found in tools/test_apps/system/gdb_loadable_elf/

Recommended sdkconfig.defaults for building loadable ELF files is as follows. CONFIG_APP_BUILD_TYPE_ELF_RAM is required, other options help reduce application memory footprint.

CONFIG_APP_BUILD_TYPE_ELF_RAM=y CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_TERMIOS= CONFIG_NEWLIB_NANO_FORMAT=y CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_PRINT_HALT=y CONFIG_ESP_DEBUG_STUBS_ENABLE= CONFIG_ESP_ERR_TO_NAME_LOOKUP=

Available options:

  • Default (binary application + 2nd stage bootloader) (APP_BUILD_TYPE_APP_2NDBOOT)

  • ELF file, loadable into RAM (EXPERIMENTAL)) (APP_BUILD_TYPE_ELF_RAM)

Application manager

Contains:

CONFIG_APP_COMPILE_TIME_DATE

Use time/date stamp for app

Found in: Application manager

If set, then the app will be built with the current time/date stamp. It is stored in the app description structure. If not set, time/date stamp will be excluded from app image. This can be useful for getting the same binary image files made from the same source, but at different times.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_APP_EXCLUDE_PROJECT_VER_VAR

Exclude PROJECT_VER from firmware image

Found in: Application manager

The PROJECT_VER variable from the build system will not affect the firmware image. This value will not be contained in the esp_app_desc structure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_EXCLUDE_PROJECT_NAME_VAR

Exclude PROJECT_NAME from firmware image

Found in: Application manager

The PROJECT_NAME variable from the build system will not affect the firmware image. This value will not be contained in the esp_app_desc structure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_PROJECT_VER_FROM_CONFIG

Get the project version from Kconfig

Found in: Application manager

If this is enabled, then config item APP_PROJECT_VER will be used for the variable PROJECT_VER. Other ways to set PROJECT_VER will be ignored.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_APP_PROJECT_VER

Project version

Found in: Application manager > CONFIG_APP_PROJECT_VER_FROM_CONFIG

Project version

Default value:

CONFIG_APP_RETRIEVE_LEN_ELF_SHA

The length of APP ELF SHA is stored in RAM(chars)

Found in: Application manager

At startup, the app will read this many hex characters from the embedded APP ELF SHA-256 hash value and store it in static RAM. This ensures the app ELF SHA-256 value is always available if it needs to be printed by the panic handler code. Changing this value will change the size of a static buffer, in bytes.

Range:

  • from 8 to 64

Default value:

  • 16

Bootloader config

Contains:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION

Bootloader optimization Level

Found in: Bootloader config

This option sets compiler optimization level (gcc -O argument) for the bootloader.

  • The default “Size” setting will add the -0s flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Debug” setting will add the -Og flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Performance” setting will add the -O2 flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “None” setting will add the -O0 flag to CFLAGS.

Note that custom optimization levels may be unsupported.

Available options:

  • Size (-Os) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_SIZE)

  • Debug (-Og) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_DEBUG)

  • Optimize for performance (-O2) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_PERF)

  • Debug without optimization (-O0) (BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_NONE)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL

Bootloader log verbosity

Found in: Bootloader config

Specify how much output to see in bootloader logs.

Available options:

  • No output (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (BOOTLOADER_LOG_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SPI_CUSTOM_WP_PIN

Use custom SPI Flash WP Pin when flash pins set in eFuse (read help)

Found in: Bootloader config

This setting is only used if the SPI flash pins have been overridden by setting the eFuses SPI_PAD_CONFIG_xxx, and the SPI flash mode is QIO or QOUT.

When this is the case, the eFuse config only defines 3 of the 4 Quad I/O data pins. The WP pin (aka ESP32 pin “SD_DATA_3” or SPI flash pin “IO2”) is not specified in eFuse. The same pin is also used for external SPIRAM if it is enabled.

If this config item is set to N (default), the correct WP pin will be automatically used for any Espressif chip or module with integrated flash. If a custom setting is needed, set this config item to Y and specify the GPIO number connected to the WP.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SPI_WP_PIN

Custom SPI Flash WP Pin

Found in: Bootloader config

The option “Use custom SPI Flash WP Pin” must be set or this value is ignored

If burning a customized set of SPI flash pins in eFuse and using QIO or QOUT mode for flash, set this value to the GPIO number of the SPI flash WP pin.

Range:

  • from 0 to 33 if ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT

Default value:

  • 7 if ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO || ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_VDDSDIO_BOOST

VDDSDIO LDO voltage

Found in: Bootloader config

If this option is enabled, and VDDSDIO LDO is set to 1.8V (using eFuse or MTDI bootstrapping pin), bootloader will change LDO settings to output 1.9V instead. This helps prevent flash chip from browning out during flash programming operations.

This option has no effect if VDDSDIO is set to 3.3V, or if the internal VDDSDIO regulator is disabled via eFuse.

Available options:

  • 1.8V (BOOTLOADER_VDDSDIO_BOOST_1_8V)

  • 1.9V (BOOTLOADER_VDDSDIO_BOOST_1_9V)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

GPIO triggers factory reset

Found in: Bootloader config

Allows to reset the device to factory settings: - clear one or more data partitions; - boot from “factory” partition. The factory reset will occur if there is a GPIO input pulled low while device starts up. See settings below.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_NUM_PIN_FACTORY_RESET

Number of the GPIO input for factory reset

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

The selected GPIO will be configured as an input with internal pull-up enabled. To trigger a factory reset, this GPIO must be pulled low on reset. Note that GPIO34-39 do not have an internal pullup and an external one must be provided.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_OTA_DATA_ERASE

Clear OTA data on factory reset (select factory partition)

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

The device will boot from “factory” partition (or OTA slot 0 if no factory partition is present) after a factory reset.

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_DATA_FACTORY_RESET

Comma-separated names of partitions to clear on factory reset

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FACTORY_RESET

Allows customers to select which data partitions will be erased while factory reset.

Specify the names of partitions as a comma-delimited with optional spaces for readability. (Like this: “nvs, phy_init, …”) Make sure that the name specified in the partition table and here are the same. Partitions of type “app” cannot be specified here.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST

GPIO triggers boot from test app partition

Found in: Bootloader config

Allows to run the test app from “TEST” partition. A boot from “test” partition will occur if there is a GPIO input pulled low while device starts up. See settings below.

Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_NUM_PIN_APP_TEST

Number of the GPIO input to boot TEST partition

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_TEST

The selected GPIO will be configured as an input with internal pull-up enabled. To trigger a test app, this GPIO must be pulled low on reset. After the GPIO input is deactivated and the device reboots, the old application will boot. (factory or OTA[x]). Note that GPIO34-39 do not have an internal pullup and an external one must be provided.

Range:
Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_HOLD_TIME_GPIO

Hold time of GPIO for reset/test mode (seconds)

Found in: Bootloader config

The GPIO must be held low continuously for this period of time after reset before a factory reset or test partition boot (as applicable) is performed.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE

Use RTC watchdog in start code

Found in: Bootloader config

Tracks the execution time of startup code. If the execution time is exceeded, the RTC_WDT will restart system. It is also useful to prevent a lock up in start code caused by an unstable power source. NOTE: Tracks the execution time starts from the bootloader code - re-set timeout, while selecting the source for slow_clk - and ends calling app_main. Re-set timeout is needed due to WDT uses a SLOW_CLK clock source. After changing a frequency slow_clk a time of WDT needs to re-set for new frequency. slow_clk depends on ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC (INTERNAL_RC or EXTERNAL_CRYSTAL).

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_DISABLE_IN_USER_CODE

Allows RTC watchdog disable in user code

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE

If it is set, the client must itself reset or disable rtc_wdt in their code (app_main()). Otherwise rtc_wdt will be disabled before calling app_main function. Use function rtc_wdt_feed() for resetting counter of rtc_wdt. Use function rtc_wdt_disable() for disabling rtc_wdt.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_TIME_MS

Timeout for RTC watchdog (ms)

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE

Verify that this parameter is correct and more then the execution time. Pay attention to options such as reset to factory, trigger test partition and encryption on boot - these options can increase the execution time. Note: RTC_WDT will reset while encryption operations will be performed.

Range:

  • from 0 to 120000

Default value:

  • 9000

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE

Enable app rollback support

Found in: Bootloader config

After updating the app, the bootloader runs a new app with the “ESP_OTA_IMG_PENDING_VERIFY” state set. This state prevents the re-run of this app. After the first boot of the new app in the user code, the function should be called to confirm the operability of the app or vice versa about its non-operability. If the app is working, then it is marked as valid. Otherwise, it is marked as not valid and rolls back to the previous working app. A reboot is performed, and the app is booted before the software update. Note: If during the first boot a new app the power goes out or the WDT works, then roll back will happen. Rollback is possible only between the apps with the same security versions.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

Enable app anti-rollback support

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE

This option prevents rollback to previous firmware/application image with lower security version.

Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_SECURE_VERSION

eFuse secure version of app

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

The secure version is the sequence number stored in the header of each firmware. The security version is set in the bootloader, version is recorded in the eFuse field as the number of set ones. The allocated number of bits in the efuse field for storing the security version is limited (see BOOTLOADER_APP_SEC_VER_SIZE_EFUSE_FIELD option).

Bootloader: When bootloader selects an app to boot, an app is selected that has a security version greater or equal that recorded in eFuse field. The app is booted with a higher (or equal) secure version.

The security version is worth increasing if in previous versions there is a significant vulnerability and their use is not acceptable.

Your partition table should has a scheme with ota_0 + ota_1 (without factory).

Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_SEC_VER_SIZE_EFUSE_FIELD

Size of the efuse secure version field

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

The size of the efuse secure version field. Its length is limited to 32 bits for ESP32 and 16 bits for ESP32-S2. This determines how many times the security version can be increased.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_EFUSE_SECURE_VERSION_EMULATE

Emulate operations with efuse secure version(only test)

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ROLLBACK_ENABLE > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_APP_ANTI_ROLLBACK

This option allow emulate read/write operations with efuse secure version. It allow to test anti-rollback implemention without permanent write eFuse bits. In partition table should be exist this partition emul_efuse, data, 5, , 0x2000.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SKIP_VALIDATE_IN_DEEP_SLEEP

Skip image validation when exiting deep sleep

Found in: Bootloader config

This option disables the normal validation of an image coming out of deep sleep (checksums, SHA256, and signature). This is a trade-off between wakeup performance from deep sleep, and image integrity checks.

Only enable this if you know what you are doing. It should not be used in conjunction with using deep_sleep() entry and changing the active OTA partition as this would skip the validation upon first load of the new OTA partition.

It is possible to enable this option with Secure Boot if “allow insecure options” is enabled, however it’s strongly recommended to NOT enable it as it may allow a Secure Boot bypass.

Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SKIP_VALIDATE_ON_POWER_ON

Skip image validation from power on reset (READ HELP FIRST)

Found in: Bootloader config

Some applications need to boot very quickly from power on. By default, the entire app binary is read from flash and verified which takes up a significant portion of the boot time.

Enabling this option will skip validation of the app when the SoC boots from power on. Note that in this case it’s not possible for the bootloader to detect if an app image is corrupted in the flash, therefore it’s not possible to safely fall back to a different app partition. Flash corruption of this kind is unlikely but can happen if there is a serious firmware bug or physical damage.

Following other reset types, the bootloader will still validate the app image. This increases the chances that flash corruption resulting in a crash can be detected following soft reset, and the bootloader will fall back to a valid app image. To increase the chances of successfully recovering from a flash corruption event, keep the option BOOTLOADER_WDT_ENABLE enabled and consider also enabling BOOTLOADER_WDT_DISABLE_IN_USER_CODE - then manually disable the RTC Watchdog once the app is running. In addition, enable both the Task and Interrupt watchdog timers with reset options set.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_SKIP_VALIDATE_ALWAYS

Skip image validation always (READ HELP FIRST)

Found in: Bootloader config

Selecting this option prevents the bootloader from ever validating the app image before booting it. Any flash corruption of the selected app partition will make the entire SoC unbootable.

Although flash corruption is a very rare case, it is not recommended to select this option. Consider selecting “Skip image validation from power on reset” instead. However, if boot time is the only important factor then it can be enabled.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC

Reserve RTC FAST memory for custom purposes

Found in: Bootloader config

This option allows the customer to place data in the RTC FAST memory, this area remains valid when rebooted, except for power loss. This memory is located at a fixed address and is available for both the bootloader and the application. (The application and bootoloader must be compiled with the same option). The RTC FAST memory has access only through PRO_CPU.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC_SIZE

Size in bytes for custom purposes

Found in: Bootloader config > CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_CUSTOM_RESERVE_RTC

This option reserves in RTC FAST memory the area for custom purposes. If you want to create your own bootloader and save more information in this area of memory, you can increase it. It must be a multiple of 4 bytes. This area (rtc_retain_mem_t) is reserved and has access from the bootloader and an application.

Range:
Default value:

CONFIG_BOOTLOADER_FLASH_XMC_SUPPORT

Enable the support for flash chips of XMC (READ HELP FIRST)

Found in: Bootloader config

Perform the startup flow recommended by XMC. Please consult XMC for the details of this flow. XMC chips will be forbidden to be used, when this option is disabled.

DON’T DISABLE THIS UNLESS YOU KNOW WHAT YOU ARE DOING.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Security features

Contains:

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_NO_SECURE_BOOT

Require signed app images

Found in: Security features

Require apps to be signed to verify their integrity.

This option uses the same app signature scheme as hardware secure boot, but unlike hardware secure boot it does not prevent the bootloader from being physically updated. This means that the device can be secured against remote network access, but not physical access. Compared to using hardware Secure Boot this option is much simpler to implement.

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_SCHEME

App Signing Scheme

Found in: Security features

Select the Secure App signing scheme. Depends on the Chip Revision. There are two options: 1. ECDSA based secure boot scheme. (Only choice for Secure Boot V1) Supported in ESP32 and ESP32-ECO3. 2. The RSA based secure boot scheme. (Only choice for Secure Boot V2) Supported in ESP32-ECO3 (ESP32 Chip Revision 3 onwards), ESP32-S2, ESP32-C3, ESP32-S3.

Available options:

  • ECDSA (SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_ECDSA_SCHEME)

    Embeds the ECDSA public key in the bootloader and signs the application with an ECDSA key.

    Refer to the documentation before enabling.

  • RSA (SECURE_SIGNED_APPS_RSA_SCHEME)

    Appends the RSA-3072 based Signature block to the application. Refer to <Secure Boot Version 2 documentation link> before enabling.

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_ON_BOOT_NO_SECURE_BOOT

Bootloader verifies app signatures

Found in: Security features

If this option is set, the bootloader will be compiled with code to verify that an app is signed before booting it.

If hardware secure boot is enabled, this option is always enabled and cannot be disabled. If hardware secure boot is not enabled, this option doesn’t add significant security by itself so most users will want to leave it disabled.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_SIGNED_ON_UPDATE_NO_SECURE_BOOT

Verify app signature on update

Found in: Security features

If this option is set, any OTA updated apps will have the signature verified before being considered valid.

When enabled, the signature is automatically checked whenever the esp_ota_ops.h APIs are used for OTA updates, or esp_image_format.h APIs are used to verify apps.

If hardware secure boot is enabled, this option is always enabled and cannot be disabled. If hardware secure boot is not enabled, this option still adds significant security against network-based attackers by preventing spoofing of OTA updates.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT

Enable hardware Secure Boot in bootloader (READ DOCS FIRST)

Found in: Security features

Build a bootloader which enables Secure Boot on first boot.

Once enabled, Secure Boot will not boot a modified bootloader. The bootloader will only load a partition table or boot an app if the data has a verified digital signature. There are implications for reflashing updated apps once secure boot is enabled.

When enabling secure boot, JTAG and ROM BASIC Interpreter are permanently disabled by default.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_VERSION

Select secure boot version

Found in: Security features > CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT

Select the Secure Boot Version. Depends on the Chip Revision. Secure Boot V2 is the new RSA based secure boot scheme. Supported in ESP32-ECO3 (ESP32 Chip Revision 3 onwards), ESP32-S2, ESP32-C3 ECO3. Secure Boot V1 is the AES based secure boot scheme. Supported in ESP32 and ESP32-ECO3.

Available options:

  • Enable Secure Boot version 1 (SECURE_BOOT_V1_ENABLED)

    Build a bootloader which enables secure boot version 1 on first boot. Refer to the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

  • Enable Secure Boot version 2 (SECURE_BOOT_V2_ENABLED)

    Build a bootloader which enables Secure Boot version 2 on first boot. Refer to Secure Boot V2 section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOTLOADER_MODE

Secure bootloader mode

Found in: Security features

Available options:

  • One-time flash (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_ONE_TIME_FLASH)

    On first boot, the bootloader will generate a key which is not readable externally or by software. A digest is generated from the bootloader image itself. This digest will be verified on each subsequent boot.

    Enabling this option means that the bootloader cannot be changed after the first time it is booted.

  • Reflashable (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_REFLASHABLE)

    Generate a reusable secure bootloader key, derived (via SHA-256) from the secure boot signing key.

    This allows the secure bootloader to be re-flashed by anyone with access to the secure boot signing key.

    This option is less secure than one-time flash, because a leak of the digest key from one device allows reflashing of any device that uses it.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_BUILD_SIGNED_BINARIES

Sign binaries during build

Found in: Security features

Once secure boot or signed app requirement is enabled, app images are required to be signed.

If enabled (default), these binary files are signed as part of the build process. The file named in “Secure boot private signing key” will be used to sign the image.

If disabled, unsigned app/partition data will be built. They must be signed manually using espsecure.py. Version 1 to enable ECDSA Based Secure Boot and Version 2 to enable RSA based Secure Boot. (for example, on a remote signing server.)

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_SIGNING_KEY

Secure boot private signing key

Found in: Security features > CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_BUILD_SIGNED_BINARIES

Path to the key file used to sign app images.

Key file is an ECDSA private key (NIST256p curve) in PEM format for Secure Boot V1. Key file is an RSA private key in PEM format for Secure Boot V2.

Path is evaluated relative to the project directory.

You can generate a new signing key by running the following command: espsecure.py generate_signing_key secure_boot_signing_key.pem

See the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version for details.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_VERIFICATION_KEY

Secure boot public signature verification key

Found in: Security features

Path to a public key file used to verify signed images. Secure Boot V1: This ECDSA public key is compiled into the bootloader and/or app, to verify app images. Secure Boot V2: This RSA public key is compiled into the signature block at the end of the bootloader/app.

Key file is in raw binary format, and can be extracted from a PEM formatted private key using the espsecure.py extract_public_key command.

Refer to the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOTLOADER_KEY_ENCODING

Hardware Key Encoding

Found in: Security features

In reflashable secure bootloader mode, a hardware key is derived from the signing key (with SHA-256) and can be written to eFuse with espefuse.py.

Normally this is a 256-bit key, but if 3/4 Coding Scheme is used on the device then the eFuse key is truncated to 192 bits.

This configuration item doesn’t change any firmware code, it only changes the size of key binary which is generated at build time.

Available options:

  • No encoding (256 bit key) (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_KEY_ENCODING_256BIT)

  • 3/4 encoding (192 bit key) (SECURE_BOOTLOADER_KEY_ENCODING_192BIT)

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_INSECURE

Allow potentially insecure options

Found in: Security features

You can disable some of the default protections offered by secure boot, in order to enable testing or a custom combination of security features.

Only enable these options if you are very sure.

Refer to the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version before enabling.

Default value:

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENC_ENABLED

Enable flash encryption on boot (READ DOCS FIRST)

Found in: Security features

If this option is set, flash contents will be encrypted by the bootloader on first boot.

Note: After first boot, the system will be permanently encrypted. Re-flashing an encrypted system is complicated and not always possible.

Read Flash 加密 before enabling.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE

Enable usage mode

Found in: Security features > CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_ENC_ENABLED

By default Development mode is enabled which allows UART bootloader to perform flash encryption operations

Select Release mode only for production or manufacturing. Once enabled you can not reflash using UART bootloader

Refer to the Secure Boot section of the ESP-IDF Programmer’s Guide for this version and Flash 加密 for details.

Available options:

  • Development(NOT SECURE) (SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT)

  • Release (SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_RELEASE)

Potentially insecure options

Contains:

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ALLOW_ROM_BASIC

Leave ROM BASIC Interpreter available on reset

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

By default, the BASIC ROM Console starts on reset if no valid bootloader is read from the flash.

When either flash encryption or secure boot are enabled, the default is to disable this BASIC fallback mode permanently via eFuse.

If this option is set, this eFuse is not burned and the BASIC ROM Console may remain accessible. Only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:
CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ALLOW_JTAG

Allow JTAG Debugging

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable JTAG (across entire chip) on first boot when either secure boot or flash encryption is enabled.

Setting this option leaves JTAG on for debugging, which negates all protections of flash encryption and some of the protections of secure boot.

Only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:
CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_ALLOW_SHORT_APP_PARTITION

Allow app partition length not 64KB aligned

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), app partition size must be a multiple of 64KB. App images are padded to 64KB length, and the bootloader checks any trailing bytes after the signature (before the next 64KB boundary) have not been written. This is because flash cache maps entire 64KB pages into the address space. This prevents an attacker from appending unverified data after the app image in the flash, causing it to be mapped into the address space.

Setting this option allows the app partition length to be unaligned, and disables padding of the app image to this length. It is generally not recommended to set this option, unless you have a legacy partitioning scheme which doesn’t support 64KB aligned partition lengths.

CONFIG_SECURE_BOOT_V2_ALLOW_EFUSE_RD_DIS

Allow additional read protecting of efuses

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default, recommended), on first boot the bootloader will burn the WR_DIS_RD_DIS efuse when Secure Boot is enabled. This prevents any more efuses from being read protected.

If this option is set, it will remain possible to write the EFUSE_RD_DIS efuse field after Secure Boot is enabled. This may allow an attacker to read-protect the BLK2 efuse (for ESP32) and BLOCK4-BLOCK10 (i.e. BLOCK_KEY0-BLOCK_KEY5)(for other chips) holding the public key digest, causing an immediate denial of service and possibly allowing an additional fault injection attack to bypass the signature protection.

NOTE: Once a BLOCK is read-protected, the application will read all zeros from that block

NOTE: If “UART ROM download mode (Permanently disabled (recommended))” or “UART ROM download mode (Permanently switch to Secure mode (recommended))” is set, then it is __NOT__ possible to read/write efuses using espefuse.py utility. However, efuse can be read/written from the application

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_UART_BOOTLOADER_ALLOW_ENC

Leave UART bootloader encryption enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable UART bootloader encryption access on first boot. If set, the UART bootloader will still be able to access hardware encryption.

It is recommended to only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_UART_BOOTLOADER_ALLOW_DEC

Leave UART bootloader decryption enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable UART bootloader decryption access on first boot. If set, the UART bootloader will still be able to access hardware decryption.

Only set this option in testing environments. Setting this option allows complete bypass of flash encryption.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_UART_BOOTLOADER_ALLOW_CACHE

Leave UART bootloader flash cache enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), the bootloader will permanently disable UART bootloader flash cache access on first boot. If set, the UART bootloader will still be able to access the flash cache.

Only set this option in testing environments.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_FLASH_REQUIRE_ALREADY_ENABLED

Require flash encryption to be already enabled

Found in: Security features > Potentially insecure options

If not set (default), and flash encryption is not yet enabled in eFuses, the 2nd stage bootloader will enable flash encryption: generate the flash encryption key and program eFuses. If this option is set, and flash encryption is not yet enabled, the bootloader will error out and reboot. If flash encryption is enabled in eFuses, this option does not change the bootloader behavior.

Only use this option in testing environments, to avoid accidentally enabling flash encryption on the wrong device. The device needs to have flash encryption already enabled using espefuse.py.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if SECURE_FLASH_ENCRYPTION_MODE_DEVELOPMENT

CONFIG_SECURE_UART_ROM_DL_MODE

UART ROM download mode

Found in: Security features

Available options:

  • UART ROM download mode (Permanently disabled (recommended)) (SECURE_DISABLE_ROM_DL_MODE)

    If set, during startup the app will burn an eFuse bit to permanently disable the UART ROM Download Mode. This prevents any future use of esptool.py, espefuse.py and similar tools.

    Once disabled, if the SoC is booted with strapping pins set for ROM Download Mode then an error is printed instead.

    It is recommended to enable this option in any production application where Flash Encryption and/or Secure Boot is enabled and access to Download Mode is not required.

    It is also possible to permanently disable Download Mode by calling esp_efuse_disable_rom_download_mode() at runtime.

  • UART ROM download mode (Permanently switch to Secure mode (recommended)) (SECURE_ENABLE_SECURE_ROM_DL_MODE)

    If set, during startup the app will burn an eFuse bit to permanently switch the UART ROM Download Mode into a separate Secure Download mode. This option can only work if Download Mode is not already disabled by eFuse.

    Secure Download mode limits the use of Download Mode functions to simple flash read, write and erase operations, plus a command to return a summary of currently enabled security features.

    Secure Download mode is not compatible with the esptool.py flasher stub feature, espefuse.py, read/writing memory or registers, encrypted download, or any other features that interact with unsupported Download Mode commands.

    Secure Download mode should be enabled in any application where Flash Encryption and/or Secure Boot is enabled. Disabling this option does not immediately cancel the benefits of the security features, but it increases the potential “attack surface” for an attacker to try and bypass them with a successful physical attack.

    It is also possible to enable secure download mode at runtime by calling esp_efuse_enable_rom_secure_download_mode()

  • UART ROM download mode (Enabled (not recommended)) (SECURE_INSECURE_ALLOW_DL_MODE)

    This is a potentially insecure option. Enabling this option will allow the full UART download mode to stay enabled. This option SHOULD NOT BE ENABLED for production use cases.

Serial flasher config

Contains:

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_PORT

Default serial port

Found in: Serial flasher config

The serial port that’s connected to the ESP chip. This can be overridden by setting the ESPPORT environment variable.

This value is ignored when using the CMake-based build system or idf.py.

Default value:

  • “/dev/ttyUSB0”

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_BAUD

Default baud rate

Found in: Serial flasher config

Default baud rate to use while communicating with the ESP chip. Can be overridden by setting the ESPBAUD variable.

This value is ignored when using the CMake-based build system or idf.py.

Available options:

  • 115200 baud (ESPTOOLPY_BAUD_115200B)

  • 230400 baud (ESPTOOLPY_BAUD_230400B)

  • 921600 baud (ESPTOOLPY_BAUD_921600B)

  • 2Mbaud (ESPTOOLPY_BAUD_2MB)

  • Other baud rate (ESPTOOLPY_BAUD_OTHER)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_BAUD_OTHER_VAL

Other baud rate value

Found in: Serial flasher config

Default value:

  • 115200

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_COMPRESSED

Use compressed upload

Found in: Serial flasher config

The flasher tool can send data compressed using zlib, letting the ROM on the ESP chip decompress it on the fly before flashing it. For most payloads, this should result in a speed increase.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_NO_STUB

Disable download stub

Found in: Serial flasher config

The flasher tool sends a precompiled download stub first by default. That stub allows things like compressed downloads and more. Usually you should not need to disable that feature

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE

Flash SPI mode

Found in: Serial flasher config

Mode the flash chip is flashed in, as well as the default mode for the binary to run in.

Available options:

  • QIO (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QIO)

  • QOUT (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_QOUT)

  • DIO (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DIO)

  • DOUT (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHMODE_DOUT)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ

Flash SPI speed

Found in: Serial flasher config

The SPI flash frequency to be used.

Available options:

  • 80 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_80M)

  • 40 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_40M)

  • 26 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_26M)

  • 20 MHz (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_20M)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE

Flash size

Found in: Serial flasher config

SPI flash size, in megabytes

Available options:

  • 1 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_1MB)

  • 2 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_2MB)

  • 4 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_4MB)

  • 8 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_8MB)

  • 16 MB (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_16MB)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE_DETECT

Detect flash size when flashing bootloader

Found in: Serial flasher config

If this option is set, flashing the project will automatically detect the flash size of the target chip and update the bootloader image before it is flashed.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_BEFORE

Before flashing

Found in: Serial flasher config

Configure whether esptool.py should reset the ESP32 before flashing.

Automatic resetting depends on the RTS & DTR signals being wired from the serial port to the ESP32. Most USB development boards do this internally.

Available options:

  • Reset to bootloader (ESPTOOLPY_BEFORE_RESET)

  • No reset (ESPTOOLPY_BEFORE_NORESET)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_AFTER

After flashing

Found in: Serial flasher config

Configure whether esptool.py should reset the ESP32 after flashing.

Automatic resetting depends on the RTS & DTR signals being wired from the serial port to the ESP32. Most USB development boards do this internally.

Available options:

  • Reset after flashing (ESPTOOLPY_AFTER_RESET)

  • Stay in bootloader (ESPTOOLPY_AFTER_NORESET)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD

‘idf.py monitor’ baud rate

Found in: Serial flasher config

Baud rate to use when running ‘idf.py monitor’ or ‘make monitor’ to view serial output from a running chip.

If “Same as UART Console baud rate” is chosen then the value will follow the “UART Console baud rate” config item.

Can override by setting the MONITORBAUD environment variable.

Available options:

  • Same as UART console baud rate (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_CONSOLE)

  • 9600 bps (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_9600B)

  • 57600 bps (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_57600B)

  • 115200 bps (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_115200B)

  • 230400 bps (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_230400B)

  • 921600 bps (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_921600B)

  • 2 Mbps (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_2MB)

  • Custom baud rate (ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_OTHER)

CONFIG_ESPTOOLPY_MONITOR_BAUD_OTHER_VAL

Custom baud rate value

Found in: Serial flasher config

Default value:

  • 115200

Partition Table

Contains:

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_TYPE

Partition Table

Found in: Partition Table

The partition table to flash to the ESP32. The partition table determines where apps, data and other resources are expected to be found.

The predefined partition table CSV descriptions can be found in the components/partition_table directory. Otherwise it’s possible to create a new custom partition CSV for your application.

Available options:

  • Single factory app, no OTA (PARTITION_TABLE_SINGLE_APP)

  • Factory app, two OTA definitions (PARTITION_TABLE_TWO_OTA)

  • Custom partition table CSV (PARTITION_TABLE_CUSTOM)

  • Single factory app, no OTA, encrypted NVS (PARTITION_TABLE_SINGLE_APP_ENCRYPTED_NVS)

  • Factory app, two OTA definitions, encrypted NVS (PARTITION_TABLE_TWO_OTA_ENCRYPTED_NVS)

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_CUSTOM_FILENAME

Custom partition CSV file

Found in: Partition Table

Name of the custom partition CSV filename. This path is evaluated relative to the project root directory.

Default value:

  • “partitions.csv”

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_OFFSET

Offset of partition table

Found in: Partition Table

The address of partition table (by default 0x8000). Allows you to move the partition table, it gives more space for the bootloader. Note that the bootloader and app will both need to be compiled with the same PARTITION_TABLE_OFFSET value.

This number should be a multiple of 0x1000.

Note that partition offsets in the partition table CSV file may need to be changed if this value is set to a higher value. To have each partition offset adapt to the configured partition table offset, leave all partition offsets blank in the CSV file.

Default value:

  • “0x8000”

CONFIG_PARTITION_TABLE_MD5

Generate an MD5 checksum for the partition table

Found in: Partition Table

Generate an MD5 checksum for the partition table for protecting the integrity of the table. The generation should be turned off for legacy bootloaders which cannot recognize the MD5 checksum in the partition table.

Default value:

Compiler options

Contains:

CONFIG_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION

Optimization Level

Found in: Compiler options

This option sets compiler optimization level (gcc -O argument) for the app.

  • The “Default” setting will add the -0g flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Size” setting will add the -0s flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “Performance” setting will add the -O2 flag to CFLAGS.

  • The “None” setting will add the -O0 flag to CFLAGS.

The “Size” setting cause the compiled code to be smaller and faster, but may lead to difficulties of correlating code addresses to source file lines when debugging.

The “Performance” setting causes the compiled code to be larger and faster, but will be easier to correlated code addresses to source file lines.

“None” with -O0 produces compiled code without optimization.

Note that custom optimization levels may be unsupported.

Compiler optimization for the IDF bootloader is set separately, see the BOOTLOADER_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION setting.

Available options:

  • Debug (-Og) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_DEFAULT)

  • Optimize for size (-Os) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_SIZE)

  • Optimize for performance (-O2) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_PERF)

  • Debug without optimization (-O0) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_NONE)

CONFIG_COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTION_LEVEL

Assertion level

Found in: Compiler options

Assertions can be:

  • Enabled. Failure will print verbose assertion details. This is the default.

  • Set to “silent” to save code size (failed assertions will abort() but user needs to use the aborting address to find the line number with the failed assertion.)

  • Disabled entirely (not recommended for most configurations.) -DNDEBUG is added to CPPFLAGS in this case.

Available options:

  • Enabled (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_ENABLE)

    Enable assertions. Assertion content and line number will be printed on failure.

  • Silent (saves code size) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_SILENT)

    Enable silent assertions. Failed assertions will abort(), user needs to use the aborting address to find the line number with the failed assertion.

  • Disabled (sets -DNDEBUG) (COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_DISABLE)

    If assertions are disabled, -DNDEBUG is added to CPPFLAGS.

CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_EXCEPTIONS

Enable C++ exceptions

Found in: Compiler options

Enabling this option compiles all IDF C++ files with exception support enabled.

Disabling this option disables C++ exception support in all compiled files, and any libstdc++ code which throws an exception will abort instead.

Enabling this option currently adds an additional ~500 bytes of heap overhead when an exception is thrown in user code for the first time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_EXCEPTIONS_EMG_POOL_SIZE

Emergency Pool Size

Found in: Compiler options > CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_EXCEPTIONS

Size (in bytes) of the emergency memory pool for C++ exceptions. This pool will be used to allocate memory for thrown exceptions when there is not enough memory on the heap.

Default value:

CONFIG_COMPILER_CXX_RTTI

Enable C++ run-time type info (RTTI)

Found in: Compiler options

Enabling this option compiles all C++ files with RTTI support enabled. This increases binary size (typically by tens of kB) but allows using dynamic_cast conversion and typeid operator.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE

Stack smashing protection mode

Found in: Compiler options

Stack smashing protection mode. Emit extra code to check for buffer overflows, such as stack smashing attacks. This is done by adding a guard variable to functions with vulnerable objects. The guards are initialized when a function is entered and then checked when the function exits. If a guard check fails, program is halted. Protection has the following modes:

  • In NORMAL mode (GCC flag: -fstack-protector) only functions that call alloca, and functions with buffers larger than 8 bytes are protected.

  • STRONG mode (GCC flag: -fstack-protector-strong) is like NORMAL, but includes additional functions to be protected – those that have local array definitions, or have references to local frame addresses.

  • In OVERALL mode (GCC flag: -fstack-protector-all) all functions are protected.

Modes have the following impact on code performance and coverage:

  • performance: NORMAL > STRONG > OVERALL

  • coverage: NORMAL < STRONG < OVERALL

Available options:

  • None (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_NONE)

  • Normal (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_NORM)

  • Strong (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_STRONG)

  • Overall (COMPILER_STACK_CHECK_MODE_ALL)

CONFIG_COMPILER_WARN_WRITE_STRINGS

Enable -Wwrite-strings warning flag

Found in: Compiler options

Adds -Wwrite-strings flag for the C/C++ compilers.

For C, this gives string constants the type const char[] so that copying the address of one into a non-const char \* pointer produces a warning. This warning helps to find at compile time code that tries to write into a string constant.

For C++, this warns about the deprecated conversion from string literals to char \*.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_COMPILER_DISABLE_GCC8_WARNINGS

Disable new warnings introduced in GCC 6 - 8

Found in: Compiler options

Enable this option if using GCC 6 or newer, and wanting to disable warnings which don’t appear with GCC 5.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_COMPILER_DUMP_RTL_FILES

Dump RTL files during compilation

Found in: Compiler options

If enabled, RTL files will be produced during compilation. These files can be used by other tools, for example to calculate call graphs.

Component config

Contains:

Application Level Tracing

Contains:

CONFIG_APPTRACE_DESTINATION

Data Destination

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Select destination for application trace: JTAG or none (to disable).

Available options:

  • JTAG (APPTRACE_DEST_JTAG)

  • None (APPTRACE_DEST_NONE)

CONFIG_APPTRACE_ONPANIC_HOST_FLUSH_TMO

Timeout for flushing last trace data to host on panic

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Timeout for flushing last trace data to host in case of panic. In ms. Use -1 to disable timeout and wait forever.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_POSTMORTEM_FLUSH_THRESH

Threshold for flushing last trace data to host on panic

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Threshold for flushing last trace data to host on panic in post-mortem mode. This is minimal amount of data needed to perform flush. In bytes.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_BUF_SIZE

Size of the apptrace buffer

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Size of the memory buffer for trace data in bytes.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_PENDING_DATA_SIZE_MAX

Size of the pending data buffer

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Size of the buffer for events in bytes. It is useful for buffering events from the time critical code (scheduler, ISRs etc). If this parameter is 0 then events will be discarded when main HW buffer is full.

FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Contains:

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

SystemView Tracing Enable

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing

Enables supporrt for SEGGER SystemView tracing functionality.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE

Timer to use as timestamp source

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

SystemView needs to use a hardware timer as the source of timestamps when tracing. This option selects the timer for it.

Available options:

  • CPU cycle counter (CCOUNT) (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_CCOUNT)

  • Timer 0, Group 0 (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_TIMER_00)

  • Timer 1, Group 0 (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_TIMER_01)

  • Timer 0, Group 1 (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_TIMER_10)

  • Timer 1, Group 1 (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_TIMER_11)

  • esp_timer high resolution timer (APPTRACE_SV_TS_SOURCE_ESP_TIMER)

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_MAX_TASKS

Maximum supported tasks

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Configures maximum supported tasks in sysview debug

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_BUF_WAIT_TMO

Trace buffer wait timeout

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Configures timeout (in us) to wait for free space in trace buffer. Set to -1 to wait forever and avoid lost events.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_OVERFLOW_ENABLE

Trace Buffer Overflow Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Trace Buffer Overflow” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_ISR_ENTER_ENABLE

ISR Enter Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “ISR Enter” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_ISR_EXIT_ENABLE

ISR Exit Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “ISR Exit” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_ISR_TO_SCHED_ENABLE

ISR Exit to Scheduler Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “ISR to Scheduler” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_START_EXEC_ENABLE

Task Start Execution Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Task Start Execution” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_STOP_EXEC_ENABLE

Task Stop Execution Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Task Stop Execution” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_START_READY_ENABLE

Task Start Ready State Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Task Start Ready State” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_STOP_READY_ENABLE

Task Stop Ready State Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Task Stop Ready State” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_CREATE_ENABLE

Task Create Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Task Create” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TASK_TERMINATE_ENABLE

Task Terminate Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Task Terminate” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_IDLE_ENABLE

System Idle Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “System Idle” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TIMER_ENTER_ENABLE

Timer Enter Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Timer Enter” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_EVT_TIMER_EXIT_ENABLE

Timer Exit Event

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing > FreeRTOS SystemView Tracing > CONFIG_APPTRACE_SV_ENABLE

Enables “Timer Exit” event.

CONFIG_APPTRACE_GCOV_ENABLE

GCOV to Host Enable

Found in: Component config > Application Level Tracing

Enables support for GCOV data transfer to host.

ESP-ASIO

Contains:

CONFIG_ASIO_SSL_SUPPORT

Enable SSL/TLS support of ASIO

Found in: Component config > ESP-ASIO

Enable support for basic SSL/TLS features, available for mbedTLS/OpenSSL as well as wolfSSL TLS library.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ASIO_SSL_LIBRARY_CHOICE

Choose SSL/TLS library for ESP-TLS (See help for more Info)

Found in: Component config > ESP-ASIO > CONFIG_ASIO_SSL_SUPPORT

The ASIO support multiple backend TLS libraries. Currently the mbedTLS with a thin ESP-OpenSSL port layer (default choice) and WolfSSL are supported. Different TLS libraries may support different features and have different resource usage. Consult the ESP-TLS documentation in ESP-IDF Programming guide for more details.

Available options:

  • esp-openssl (ASIO_USE_ESP_OPENSSL)

  • wolfSSL (License info in wolfSSL directory README) (ASIO_USE_ESP_WOLFSSL)

Bluetooth

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

Bluetooth

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth

Select this option to enable Bluetooth and show the submenu with Bluetooth configuration choices.

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODE

Bluetooth controller mode (BR/EDR/BLE/DUALMODE)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

Specify the bluetooth controller mode (BR/EDR, BLE or dual mode).

Available options:

  • BLE Only (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY)

  • BR/EDR Only (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY)

  • Bluetooth Dual Mode (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BLE_MAX_CONN

BLE Max Connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

BLE maximum connections of bluetooth controller. Each connection uses 1KB static DRAM whenever the BT controller is enabled.

Range:

  • from 1 to 9 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_MAX_ACL_CONN

BR/EDR ACL Max Connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

BR/EDR ACL maximum connections of bluetooth controller. Each connection uses 1.2KB static DRAM whenever the BT controller is enabled.

Range:

  • from 1 to 7 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_MAX_SYNC_CONN

BR/EDR Sync(SCO/eSCO) Max Connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

BR/EDR Synchronize maximum connections of bluetooth controller. Each connection uses 2KB static DRAM whenever the BT controller is enabled.

Range:

  • from 0 to 3 if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_SCO_DATA_PATH

BR/EDR Sync(SCO/eSCO) default data path

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

SCO data path, i.e. HCI or PCM. SCO data can be sent/received through HCI synchronous packets, or the data can be routed to on-chip PCM module on ESP32. PCM input/output signals can be “matrixed” to GPIOs. The default data path can also be set using API “esp_bredr_sco_datapath_set”

Available options:

  • HCI (BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_SCO_DATA_PATH_HCI)

  • PCM (BTDM_CTRL_BR_EDR_SCO_DATA_PATH_PCM)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_EDGE_CONFIG

PCM Signal Config (Role and Polar)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

Default value:

Contains:

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE

PCM Role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_EDGE_CONFIG

PCM role can be configured as PCM master or PCM slave

Available options:

  • PCM Master (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_MASTER)

  • PCM Slave (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_SLAVE)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_POLAR

PCM Polar

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PCM_ROLE_EDGE_CONFIG

PCM polarity can be configured as Falling Edge or Rising Edge

Available options:

  • Falling Edge (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_POLAR_FALLING_EDGE)

  • Rising Edge (BTDM_CTRL_PCM_POLAR_RISING_EDGE)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_AUTO_LATENCY

Auto latency

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

BLE auto latency, used to enhance classic BT performance while classic BT and BLE are enabled at the same time.

Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_LEGACY_AUTH_VENDOR_EVT

Legacy Authentication Vendor Specific Event Enable

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

To protect from BIAS attack during Legacy authentication, Legacy authentication Vendor specific event should be enabled

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BR_EDR_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_PINNED_TO_CORE_CHOICE

The cpu core which bluetooth controller run

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

Specify the cpu core to run bluetooth controller. Can not specify no-affinity.

Available options:

  • Core 0 (PRO CPU) (BTDM_CTRL_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (APP CPU) (BTDM_CTRL_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_CHOICE

HCI mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

Speicify HCI mode as VHCI or UART(H4)

Available options:

  • VHCI (BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_VHCI)

    Normal option. Mostly, choose this VHCI when bluetooth host run on ESP32, too.

  • UART(H4) (BTDM_CTRL_HCI_MODE_UART_H4)

    If use external bluetooth host which run on other hardware and use UART as the HCI interface, choose this option.

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HCI_UART_NO

UART Number for HCI

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > HCI UART(H4) Options

Uart number for HCI. The available uart is UART1 and UART2.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_HCI_UART_BAUDRATE

UART Baudrate for HCI

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > HCI UART(H4) Options

UART Baudrate for HCI. Please use standard baudrate.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP

Bluetooth modem sleep

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > MODEM SLEEP Options

Enable/disable bluetooth controller low power mode.

Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP_MODE

Bluetooth Modem sleep mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > MODEM SLEEP Options > CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP

To select which strategy to use for modem sleep

Available options:

  • ORIG Mode(sleep with low power clock) (BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP_MODE_ORIG)

    ORIG mode is a bluetooth sleep mode that can be used for dual mode controller. In this mode, bluetooth controller sleeps between BR/EDR frames and BLE events. A low power clock is used to maintain bluetooth reference clock.

  • EVED Mode(For internal test only) (BTDM_CTRL_MODEM_SLEEP_MODE_EVED)

    EVED mode is for BLE only and is only for internal test. Do not use it for production. this mode is not compatible with DFS nor light sleep

CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_LOW_POWER_CLOCK

Bluetooth low power clock

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > MODEM SLEEP Options

Select the low power clock source for bluetooth controller. Bluetooth low power clock is the clock source to maintain time in sleep mode.

  • “Main crystal” option provides good accuracy and can support Dynamic Frequency Scaling to be used with Bluetooth modem sleep. Light sleep is not supported.

  • “External 32kHz crystal” option allows user to use a 32.768kHz crystal as Bluetooth low power clock. This option is allowed as long as External 32kHz crystal is configured as the system RTC clock source. This option provides good accuracy and supports Bluetooth modem sleep to be used alongside Dynamic Frequency Scaling or light sleep.

Available options:

  • Main crystal (BTDM_CTRL_LPCLK_SEL_MAIN_XTAL)

    Main crystal can be used as low power clock for bluetooth modem sleep. If this option is selected, bluetooth modem sleep can work under Dynamic Frequency Scaling(DFS) enabled, but cannot work when light sleep is enabled. Main crystal has a good performance in accuracy as the bluetooth low power clock source.

  • External 32kHz crystal (BTDM_CTRL_LPCLK_SEL_EXT_32K_XTAL)

    External 32kHz crystal has a nominal frequency of 32.768kHz and provides good frequency stability. If used as Bluetooth low power clock, External 32kHz can support Bluetooth modem sleep to be used with both DFS and light sleep.

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SLEEP_CLOCK_ACCURACY

BLE Sleep Clock Accuracy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

BLE Sleep Clock Accuracy(SCA) for the local device is used to estimate window widening in BLE connection events. With a lower level of clock accuracy(e.g. 500ppm over 250ppm), the slave needs a larger RX window to synchronize with master in each anchor point, thus resulting in an increase of power consumption but a higher level of robustness in keeping connected. According to the requirements of Bluetooth Core specification 4.2, the worst-case accuracy of Classic Bluetooth low power oscialltor(LPO) is +/-250ppm in STANDBY and in low power modes such as sniff. For BLE the worst-case SCA is +/-500ppm.

  • “151ppm to 250ppm” option is the default value for Bluetooth Dual mode

  • “251ppm to 500ppm” option can be used in BLE only mode when using external 32kHz crystal as

    low power clock. This option is provided in case that BLE sleep clock has a lower level of accuracy, or other error sources contribute to the inaccurate timing during sleep.

Available options:

  • 251ppm to 500ppm (BTDM_BLE_DEFAULT_SCA_500PPM)

  • 151ppm to 250ppm (BTDM_BLE_DEFAULT_SCA_250PPM)

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

BLE Scan Duplicate Options

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

This select enables parameters setting of BLE scan duplicate.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY) && CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE

Scan Duplicate Type

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

Scan duplicate have three ways. one is “Scan Duplicate By Device Address”, This way is to use advertiser address filtering. The adv packet of the same address is only allowed to be reported once. Another way is “Scan Duplicate By Device Address And Advertising Data”. This way is to use advertising data and device address filtering. All different adv packets with the same address are allowed to be reported. The last way is “Scan Duplicate By Advertising Data”. This way is to use advertising data filtering. All same advertising data only allow to be reported once even though they are from different devices.

Available options:

  • Scan Duplicate By Device Address (BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE_DEVICE)

    This way is to use advertiser address filtering. The adv packet of the same address is only allowed to be reported once

  • Scan Duplicate By Advertising Data (BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE_DATA)

    This way is to use advertising data filtering. All same advertising data only allow to be reported once even though they are from different devices.

  • Scan Duplicate By Device Address And Advertising Data (BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_TYPE_DATA_DEVICE)

    This way is to use advertising data and device address filtering. All different adv packets with the same address are allowed to be reported.

CONFIG_BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_CACHE_SIZE

Maximum number of devices in scan duplicate filter

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

Maximum number of devices which can be recorded in scan duplicate filter. When the maximum amount of device in the filter is reached, the cache will be refreshed.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_SCAN_DUPL_CACHE_REFRESH_PERIOD

Duplicate scan list refresh period (seconds)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

If the period value is non-zero, the controller will periodically clear the device information stored in the scan duuplicate filter. If it is 0, the scan duuplicate filter will not be cleared until the scanning is disabled. Duplicate advertisements for this period should not be sent to the Host in advertising report events. There are two scenarios where the ADV packet will be repeatedly reported: 1. The duplicate scan cache is full, the controller will delete the oldest device information and add new device information. 2. When the refresh period is up, the controller will clear all device information and start filtering again.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_MESH_SCAN_DUPL_EN

Special duplicate scan mechanism for BLE Mesh scan

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL

This enables the BLE scan duplicate for special BLE Mesh scan.

Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_MESH_DUPL_SCAN_CACHE_SIZE

Maximum number of Mesh adv packets in scan duplicate filter

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_SCAN_DUPL > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_MESH_SCAN_DUPL_EN

Maximum number of adv packets which can be recorded in duplicate scan cache for BLE Mesh. When the maximum amount of device in the filter is reached, the cache will be refreshed.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_CTRL_FULL_SCAN_SUPPORTED

BLE full scan feature supported

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

The full scan function is mainly used to provide BLE scan performance. This is required for scenes with high scan performance requirements, such as BLE Mesh scenes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM) && CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_SUPP

BLE adv report flow control supported

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller

The function is mainly used to enable flow control for advertising reports. When it is enabled, advertising reports will be discarded by the controller if the number of unprocessed advertising reports exceeds the size of BLE adv report flow control.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if (BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BTDM || BTDM_CTRL_MODE_BLE_ONLY) && CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM

BLE adv report flow control number

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_SUPP

The number of unprocessed advertising report that Bluedroid can save.If you set BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM to a small value, this may cause adv packets lost. If you set BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM to a large value, Bluedroid may cache a lot of adv packets and this may cause system memory run out. For example, if you set it to 50, the maximum memory consumed by host is 35 * 50 bytes. Please set BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_NUM according to your system free memory and handle adv packets as fast as possible, otherwise it will cause adv packets lost.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_DISCARD_THRSHOLD

BLE adv lost event threshold value

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED > Bluetooth controller > CONFIG_BTDM_BLE_ADV_REPORT_FLOW_CTRL_SUPP

When adv report flow control is enabled, The ADV lost event will be generated when the number of ADV packets lost in the controller reaches this threshold. It is better to set a larger value. If you set it to a small value or printf every adv lost event, it may cause adv packets lost more.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HOST

Bluetooth Host

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > CONFIG_BT_ENABLED

This helps to choose Bluetooth host stack

Available options:

  • Bluedroid - Dual-mode (BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED)

    This option is recommended for classic Bluetooth or for dual-mode usecases

  • NimBLE - BLE only (BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED)

    This option is recommended for BLE only usecases to save on memory

  • Controller Only (BT_CONTROLLER_ONLY)

    This option is recommended when you want to communicate directly with the controller (without any host) or when you are using any other host stack not supported by Espressif (not mentioned here).

Bluedroid Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_BTC_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Bluetooth event (callback to application) task stack size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select btc task stack size

Default value:

  • 3072 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLUEDROID_PINNED_TO_CORE_CHOICE

The cpu core which Bluedroid run

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Which the cpu core to run Bluedroid. Can choose core0 and core1. Can not specify no-affinity.

Available options:

  • Core 0 (PRO CPU) (BT_BLUEDROID_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (APP CPU) (BT_BLUEDROID_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_BT_BTU_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Bluetooth Bluedroid Host Stack task stack size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select btu task stack size

Default value:

  • 4096 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLUEDROID_MEM_DEBUG

Bluedroid memory debug

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Bluedroid memory debug

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

Classic Bluetooth

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

For now this option needs “SMP_ENABLE” to be set to yes

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_A2DP_ENABLE

A2DP

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

Advanced Audio Distrubution Profile

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_SPP_ENABLED

SPP

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

This enables the Serial Port Profile

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HFP_ENABLE

Hands Free/Handset Profile

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_HFP_ROLE

Hands-free Profile Role configuration

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_HFP_ENABLE

Available options:

  • Hands Free Unit (BT_HFP_CLIENT_ENABLE)

  • Audio Gateway (BT_HFP_AG_ENABLE)

CONFIG_BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH

audio(SCO) data path

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_CLASSIC_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_HFP_ENABLE

SCO data path, i.e. HCI or PCM. This option is set using API “esp_bredr_sco_datapath_set” in Bluetooth host. Default SCO data path can also be set in Bluetooth Controller.

Available options:

  • PCM (BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH_PCM)

  • HCI (BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH_HCI)

CONFIG_BT_HFP_WBS_ENABLE

Wide Band Speech

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables Wide Band Speech. Should disable it when SCO data path is PCM. Otherwise there will be no data transmited via GPIOs.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_HFP_AUDIO_DATA_PATH_HCI && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_HID_HOST_ENABLED

Classic BT HID Host

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables the BT HID Host

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_SSP_ENABLED

Secure Simple Pairing

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables the Secure Simple Pairing. If disable this option, Bluedroid will only support Legacy Pairing

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

Bluetooth Low Energy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables Bluetooth Low Energy

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Include GATT server module(GATTS)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

This option can be disabled when the app work only on gatt client mode

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTS_PPCP_CHAR_GAP

Enable Peripheral Preferred Connection Parameters characteristic in GAP service

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

This enables “Peripheral Preferred Connection Parameters” characteristic (UUID: 0x2A04) in GAP service that has connection parameters like min/max connection interval, slave latency and supervision timeout multiplier

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_BLUFI_ENABLE

Include blufi function

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

This option can be close when the app does not require blufi function.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATT_MAX_SR_PROFILES

Max GATT Server Profiles

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Maximum GATT Server Profiles Count

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATT_MAX_SR_ATTRIBUTES

Max GATT Service Attributes

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Maximum GATT Service Attributes Count

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTS_SEND_SERVICE_CHANGE_MODE

GATTS Service Change Mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTS_ENABLE

Service change indication mode for GATT Server.

Available options:

  • GATTS manually send service change indication (BT_GATTS_SEND_SERVICE_CHANGE_MANUAL)

    Manually send service change indication through API esp_ble_gatts_send_service_change_indication()

  • GATTS automatically send service change indication (BT_GATTS_SEND_SERVICE_CHANGE_AUTO)

    Let Bluedroid handle the service change indication internally

CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

Include GATT client module(GATTC)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

This option can be close when the app work only on gatt server mode

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_MAX_CACHE_CHAR

Max gattc cache characteristic for discover

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

Maximum GATTC cache characteristic count

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_CACHE_NVS_FLASH

Save gattc cache data to nvs flash

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

This select can save gattc cache data to nvs flash

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_GATTC_CONNECT_RETRY_COUNT

The number of attempts to reconnect if the connection establishment failed

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_GATTC_ENABLE

The number of attempts to reconnect if the connection establishment failed

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_BLE_SMP_ENABLE

Include BLE security module(SMP)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED

This option can be close when the app not used the ble security connect.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_SMP_SLAVE_CON_PARAMS_UPD_ENABLE

Slave enable connection parameters update during pairing

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > CONFIG_BT_BLE_ENABLED > CONFIG_BT_BLE_SMP_ENABLE

In order to reduce the pairing time, slave actively initiates connection parameters update during pairing.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_STACK_NO_LOG

Disable BT debug logs (minimize bin size)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select can save the rodata code size

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL

HCI layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for HCI layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_HCI_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL

BTM layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BTM layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BTM_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL

L2CAP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for L2CAP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_L2CAP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL

RFCOMM layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for RFCOMM layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_RFCOMM_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL

SDP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for SDP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_SDP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL

GAP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for GAP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_GAP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL

BNEP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BNEP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BNEP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL

PAN layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for PAN layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_PAN_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL

A2D layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for A2D layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_A2D_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL

AVDT layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for AVDT layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_AVDT_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL

AVCT layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for AVCT layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_AVCT_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL

AVRC layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for AVRC layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_AVRC_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL

MCA layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for MCA layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_MCA_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL

HID layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for HID layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_HID_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL

APPL layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for APPL layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_APPL_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL

GATT layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for GATT layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_GATT_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL

SMP layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for SMP layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_SMP_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL

BTIF layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BTIF layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BTIF_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL

BTC layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BTC layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BTC_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL

OSI layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for OSI layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_OSI_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL

BLUFI layer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options > BT DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BT trace level for BLUFI layer

Available options:

  • NONE (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • API (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_API)

  • EVENT (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_EVENT)

  • DEBUG (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BT_LOG_BLUFI_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BT_ACL_CONNECTIONS

BT/BLE MAX ACL CONNECTIONS(1~9)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Maximum BT/BLE connection count. The ESP32-C3/S3 chip supports a maximum of 10 instances, including ADV, SCAN and connections. The ESP32-C3/S3 chip can connect up to 9 devices if ADV or SCAN uses only one. If ADV and SCAN are both used, The ESP32-C3/S3 chip is connected to a maximum of 8 devices. Because Bluetooth cannot reclaim used instances once ADV or SCAN is used.

Range:

  • from 1 to 9 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 4 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_MULTI_CONNECTION_ENBALE

Enable BLE multi-conections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Enable this option if there are multiple connections

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_ALLOCATION_FROM_SPIRAM_FIRST

BT/BLE will first malloc the memory from the PSRAM

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select can save the internal RAM if there have the PSRAM

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_DYNAMIC_ENV_MEMORY

Use dynamic memory allocation in BT/BLE stack

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This select can make the allocation of memory will become more flexible

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_HOST_QUEUE_CONG_CHECK

BLE queue congestion check

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

When scanning and scan duplicate is not enabled, if there are a lot of adv packets around or application layer handling adv packets is slow, it will cause the controller memory to run out. if enabled, adv packets will be lost when host queue is congested.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_ACT_SCAN_REP_ADV_SCAN

Report adv data and scan response individually when BLE active scan

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Originally, when doing BLE active scan, Bluedroid will not report adv to application layer until receive scan response. This option is used to disable the behavior. When enable this option, Bluedroid will report adv data or scan response to application layer immediately.

# Memory reserved at start of DRAM for Bluetooth stack

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_MAX_DEVICE_NAME_LEN

length of bluetooth device name

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

Bluetooth Device name length shall be no larger than 248 octets, If the broadcast data cannot contain the complete device name, then only the shortname will be displayed, the rest parts that can’t fit in will be truncated.

Range:

  • from 32 to 248 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 32 if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_BLE_RPA_SUPPORTED

Update RPA to Controller

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > Bluedroid Options

This enables controller RPA list function. For ESP32, ESP32 only support network privacy mode. If this option is enabled, ESP32 will only accept advertising packets from peer devices that contain private address, HW will not receive the advertising packets contain identity address after IRK changed. If this option is disabled, address resolution will be performed in the host, so the functions that require controller to resolve address in the white list cannot be used. This option is disabled by default on ESP32, please enable or disable this option according to your own needs.

For ESP32C3 and esp32s3, devices support network privacy mode and device privacy mode, users can switch the two modes according to their own needs. So this option is enabled by default.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED && BT_BLUEDROID_ENABLED

NimBLE Options

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation strategy

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Allocation strategy for NimBLE host stack, essentially provides ability to allocate all required dynamic allocations from,

  • Internal DRAM memory only

  • External SPIRAM memory only

  • Either internal or external memory based on default malloc() behavior in ESP-IDF

  • Internal IRAM memory wherever applicable else internal DRAM

Available options:

  • Internal memory (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_INTERNAL)

  • External SPIRAM (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_EXTERNAL)

  • Default alloc mode (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_DEFAULT)

  • Internal IRAM (BT_NIMBLE_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_IRAM_8BIT)

    Allows to use IRAM memory region as 8bit accessible region.

    Every unaligned (8bit or 16bit) access will result in an exception and incur penalty of certain clock cycles per unaligned read/write.

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL

NimBLE Host log verbosity

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Select NimBLE log level. Please make a note that the selected NimBLE log verbosity can not exceed the level set in “Component config –> Log output –> Default log verbosity”.

Available options:

  • No logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • Info logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug logs (BT_NIMBLE_LOG_LEVEL_DEBUG)

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_CONNECTIONS

Maximum number of concurrent connections

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of concurrent BLE connections. For ESP32, user is expected to configure BTDM_CTRL_BLE_MAX_CONN from controller menu along with this option. Similarly for ESP32-C3 or ESP32-S3, user is expected to configure BT_CTRL_BLE_MAX_ACT from controller menu.

Range:

  • from 1 to 9 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 3 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_BONDS

Maximum number of bonds to save across reboots

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of bonds to save for peer security and our security

Default value:

  • 3 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_CCCDS

Maximum number of CCC descriptors to save across reboots

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of CCC descriptors to save

Default value:

  • 8 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_L2CAP_COC_MAX_NUM

Maximum number of connection oriented channels

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Defines maximum number of BLE Connection Oriented Channels. When set to (0), BLE COC is not compiled in

Range:

  • from 0 to 9 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 0 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_PINNED_TO_CORE_CHOICE

The CPU core on which NimBLE host will run

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

The CPU core on which NimBLE host will run. You can choose Core 0 or Core 1. Cannot specify no-affinity

Available options:

  • Core 0 (PRO CPU) (BT_NIMBLE_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (APP CPU) (BT_NIMBLE_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_TASK_STACK_SIZE

NimBLE Host task stack size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This configures stack size of NimBLE host task

Default value:

  • 5120 if CONFIG_BLE_MESH && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

  • 4096 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_CENTRAL

Enable BLE Central role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_PERIPHERAL

Enable BLE Peripheral role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_BROADCASTER

Enable BLE Broadcaster role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ROLE_OBSERVER

Enable BLE Observer role

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_NVS_PERSIST

Persist the BLE Bonding keys in NVS

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable this flag to make bonding persistent across device reboots

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SM_LEGACY

Security manager legacy pairing

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable security manager legacy pairing

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SM_SC

Security manager secure connections (4.2)

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable security manager secure connections

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_DEBUG

Enable extra runtime asserts and host debugging

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This enables extra runtime asserts and host debugging

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SM_SC_DEBUG_KEYS

Use predefined public-private key pair

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

If this option is enabled, SM uses predefined DH key pair as described in Core Specification, Vol. 3, Part H, 2.3.5.6.1. This allows to decrypt air traffic easily and thus should only be used for debugging.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SVC_GAP_DEVICE_NAME

BLE GAP default device name

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

The Device Name characteristic shall contain the name of the device as an UTF-8 string. This name can be changed by using API ble_svc_gap_device_name_set()

Default value:

  • “nimble” if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_GAP_DEVICE_NAME_MAX_LEN

Maximum length of BLE device name in octets

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Device Name characteristic value shall be 0 to 248 octets in length

Default value:

  • 31 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ATT_PREFERRED_MTU

Preferred MTU size in octets

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This is the default value of ATT MTU indicated by the device during an ATT MTU exchange. This value can be changed using API ble_att_set_preferred_mtu()

Default value:

  • 256 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_SVC_GAP_APPEARANCE

External appearance of the device

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Standard BLE GAP Appearance value in HEX format e.g. 0x02C0

Default value:

  • 0 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ACL_BUF_COUNT

ACL Buffer count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

The number of ACL data buffers.

Default value:

  • 20 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ACL_BUF_SIZE

ACL Buffer size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This is the maximum size of the data portion of HCI ACL data packets. It does not include the HCI data header (of 4 bytes)

Default value:

  • 255 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HCI_EVT_BUF_SIZE

HCI Event Buffer size

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This is the size of each HCI event buffer in bytes. In case of extended advertising, packets can be fragmented. 257 bytes is the maximum size of a packet.

Default value:

  • 70 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HCI_EVT_HI_BUF_COUNT

High Priority HCI Event Buffer count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This is the high priority HCI events’ buffer size. High-priority event buffers are for everything except advertising reports. If there are no free high-priority event buffers then host will try to allocate a low-priority buffer instead

Default value:

  • 30 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HCI_EVT_LO_BUF_COUNT

Low Priority HCI Event Buffer count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

This is the low priority HCI events’ buffer size. Low-priority event buffers are only used for advertising reports. If there are no free low-priority event buffers, then an incoming advertising report will get dropped

Default value:

  • 8 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MSYS1_BLOCK_COUNT

MSYS_1 Block Count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

MSYS is a system level mbuf registry. For prepare write & prepare responses MBUFs are allocated out of msys_1 pool. For NIMBLE_MESH enabled cases, this block count is increased by 8 than user defined count.

Default value:

  • 12 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Enable Host Flow control

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable Host Flow control

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL_ITVL

Host Flow control interval

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Host flow control interval in msecs

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL_THRESH

Host Flow control threshold

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Host flow control threshold, if the number of free buffers are at or below this threshold, send an immediate number-of-completed-packets event

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL_TX_ON_DISCONNECT

Host Flow control on disconnect

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_FLOW_CTRL

Enable this option to send number-of-completed-packets event to controller after disconnection

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_RPA_TIMEOUT

RPA timeout in seconds

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Time interval between RPA address change. This is applicable in case of Host based RPA

Range:

  • from 1 to 41400 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Default value:

  • 900 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable BLE mesh functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable BLE Mesh example present in upstream mynewt-nimble and not maintained by Espressif.

IDF maintains ESP-BLE-MESH as the official Mesh solution. Please refer to ESP-BLE-MESH guide at: :doc:../esp32/api-guides/esp-ble-mesh/ble-mesh-index``

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

Contains:

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROXY

Enable mesh proxy functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable proxy. This is automatically set whenever NIMBLE_MESH_PB_GATT or NIMBLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY is set

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROV

Enable BLE mesh provisioning

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable mesh provisioning

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PB_ADV

Enable mesh provisioning over advertising bearer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROV

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over the advertising bearer

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PB_GATT

Enable mesh provisioning over GATT bearer

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROV

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over the GATT bearer

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY

Enable GATT Proxy functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

This option enables support for the Mesh GATT Proxy Service, i.e. the ability to act as a proxy between a Mesh GATT Client and a Mesh network

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_RELAY

Enable mesh relay functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Support for acting as a Mesh Relay Node

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Enable mesh low power mode

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable this option to be able to act as a Low Power Node

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_FRIEND

Enable mesh friend functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable this option to be able to act as a Friend Node

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_DEVICE_NAME

Set mesh device name

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

This value defines Bluetooth Mesh device/node name

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_NODE_COUNT

Set mesh node count

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Defines mesh node count.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

Enable BLE mesh provisioner

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MESH

Enable mesh provisioner.

Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_CRYPTO_STACK_MBEDTLS

Override TinyCrypt with mbedTLS for crypto computations

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable this option to choose mbedTLS instead of TinyCrypt for crypto computations.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_HS_STOP_TIMEOUT_MS

BLE host stop timeout in msec

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

BLE Host stop procedure timeout in milliseconds.

Default value:

  • 2000 if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_CONN_REATTEMPT

Enable connection reattempts on connection establishment error

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Enable to make the NimBLE host to reattempt GAP connection on connection establishment failure.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_MAX_CONN_REATTEMPT

Maximum number connection reattempts

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options > CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_ENABLE_CONN_REATTEMPT

Defines maximum number of connection reattempts.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_USE_ESP_TIMER

Enable Esp Timer for Nimble

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Set this option to use Esp Timer which has higher priority timer instead of FreeRTOS timer

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BT_NIMBLE_BLUFI_ENABLE

Enable blufi functionality

Found in: Component config > Bluetooth > NimBLE Options

Set this option to enable blufi functionality.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED && BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_BLE_MESH

ESP BLE Mesh Support

Found in: Component config

This option enables ESP BLE Mesh support. The specific features that are available may depend on other features that have been enabled in the stack, such as Bluetooth Support, Bluedroid Support & GATT support.

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_HCI_5_0

Support sending 20ms non-connectable adv packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

It is a temporary solution and needs further modifications.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_USE_DUPLICATE_SCAN

Support Duplicate Scan in BLE Mesh

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow using specific duplicate scan filter in BLE Mesh, and Scan Duplicate Type must be set by choosing the option in the Bluetooth Controller section in menuconfig, which is “Scan Duplicate By Device Address and Advertising Data”.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation strategy

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Allocation strategy for BLE Mesh stack, essentially provides ability to allocate all required dynamic allocations from,

  • Internal DRAM memory only

  • External SPIRAM memory only

  • Either internal or external memory based on default malloc() behavior in ESP-IDF

  • Internal IRAM memory wherever applicable else internal DRAM

Recommended mode here is always internal (*), since that is most preferred from security perspective. But if application requirement does not allow sufficient free internal memory then alternate mode can be selected.

(*) In case of ESP32-S2/ESP32-S3, hardware allows encryption of external SPIRAM contents provided hardware flash encryption feature is enabled. In that case, using external SPIRAM allocation strategy is also safe choice from security perspective.

Available options:

  • Internal DRAM (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_INTERNAL)

  • External SPIRAM (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_EXTERNAL)

  • Default alloc mode (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_DEFAULT)

    Enable this option to use the default memory allocation strategy when external SPIRAM is enabled. See the SPIRAM options for more details.

  • Internal IRAM (BLE_MESH_MEM_ALLOC_MODE_IRAM_8BIT)

    Allows to use IRAM memory region as 8bit accessible region. Every unaligned (8bit or 16bit) access will result in an exception and incur penalty of certain clock cycles per unaligned read/write.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC

Enable FreeRTOS static allocation

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to use FreeRTOS static allocation APIs for BLE Mesh, which provides the ability to use different dynamic memory (i.e. SPIRAM or IRAM) for FreeRTOS objects. If this option is disabled, the FreeRTOS static allocation APIs will not be used, and internal DRAM will be allocated for FreeRTOS objects.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation for FreeRTOS objects

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC

Choose the memory to be used for FreeRTOS objects.

Available options:

  • External SPIRAM (BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC_EXTERNAL)

    If enabled, BLE Mesh allocates dynamic memory from external SPIRAM for FreeRTOS objects, i.e. mutex, queue, and task stack. External SPIRAM can only be used for task stack when SPIRAM_ALLOW_STACK_EXTERNAL_MEMORY is enabled. See the SPIRAM options for more details.

  • Internal IRAM (BLE_MESH_FREERTOS_STATIC_ALLOC_IRAM_8BIT)

    If enabled, BLE Mesh allocates dynamic memory from internal IRAM for FreeRTOS objects, i.e. mutex, queue. Note: IRAM region cannot be used as task stack.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEINIT

Support de-initialize BLE Mesh stack

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

If enabled, users can use the function esp_ble_mesh_deinit() to de-initialize the whole BLE Mesh stack.

Default value:
BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUPPORT_BLE_ADV

Support sending normal BLE advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support

When selected, users can send normal BLE advertising packets with specific API.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_BLE_ADV_BUF_COUNT

Number of advertising buffers for BLE advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUPPORT_BLE_ADV

Number of advertising buffers for BLE packets available.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUPPORT_BLE_SCAN

Support scanning normal BLE advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh and BLE coexistence support

When selected, users can register a callback and receive normal BLE advertising packets in the application layer.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FAST_PROV

Enable BLE Mesh Fast Provisioning

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow BLE Mesh fast provisioning solution to be used. When there are multiple unprovisioned devices around, fast provisioning can greatly reduce the time consumption of the whole provisioning process. When this option is enabled, and after an unprovisioned device is provisioned into a node successfully, it can be changed to a temporary Provisioner.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NODE

Support for BLE Mesh Node

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable the device to be provisioned into a node. This option should be enabled when an unprovisioned device is going to be provisioned into a node and communicate with other nodes in the BLE Mesh network.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

Support for BLE Mesh Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable the device to be a Provisioner. The option should be enabled when a device is going to act as a Provisioner and provision unprovisioned devices into the BLE Mesh network.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_WAIT_FOR_PROV_MAX_DEV_NUM

Maximum number of unprovisioned devices that can be added to device queue

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many unprovisioned devices can be added to device queue for provisioning. Users can use this option to define the size of the queue in the bottom layer which is used to store unprovisioned device information (e.g. Device UUID, address).

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MAX_PROV_NODES

Maximum number of devices that can be provisioned by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many devices can be provisioned by a Provisioner. This value indicates the maximum number of unprovisioned devices which can be provisioned by a Provisioner. For instance, if the value is 6, it means the Provisioner can provision up to 6 unprovisioned devices. Theoretically a Provisioner without the limitation of its memory can provision up to 32766 unprovisioned devices, here we limit the maximum number to 100 just to limit the memory used by a Provisioner. The bigger the value is, the more memory it will cost by a Provisioner to store the information of nodes.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PBA_SAME_TIME

Maximum number of PB-ADV running at the same time by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many devices can be provisioned at the same time using PB-ADV. For examples, if the value is 2, it means a Provisioner can provision two unprovisioned devices with PB-ADV at the same time.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PBG_SAME_TIME

Maximum number of PB-GATT running at the same time by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many devices can be provisioned at the same time using PB-GATT. For example, if the value is 2, it means a Provisioner can provision two unprovisioned devices with PB-GATT at the same time.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_SUBNET_COUNT

Maximum number of mesh subnets that can be created by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many subnets per network a Provisioner can create. Indeed, this value decides the number of network keys which can be added by a Provisioner.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_APP_KEY_COUNT

Maximum number of application keys that can be owned by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

This option specifies how many application keys the Provisioner can have. Indeed, this value decides the number of the application keys which can be added by a Provisioner.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_RECV_HB

Support receiving Heartbeat messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER

When this option is enabled, Provisioner can call specific functions to enable or disable receiving Heartbeat messages and notify them to the application layer.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_RECV_HB_FILTER_SIZE

Maximum number of filter entries for receiving Heartbeat messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROVISIONER_RECV_HB

This option specifies how many heartbeat filter entries Provisioner supports. The heartbeat filter (acceptlist or rejectlist) entries are used to store a list of SRC and DST which can be used to decide if a heartbeat message will be processed and notified to the application layer by Provisioner. Note: The filter is an empty rejectlist by default.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROV

BLE Mesh Provisioning support

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to support BLE Mesh Provisioning functionality. For BLE Mesh, this option should be always enabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PB_ADV

Provisioning support using the advertising bearer (PB-ADV)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over the advertising bearer. This option should be enabled if PB-ADV is going to be used during provisioning procedure.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_UNPROVISIONED_BEACON_INTERVAL

Interval between two consecutive Unprovisioned Device Beacon

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PB_ADV

This option specifies the interval of sending two consecutive unprovisioned device beacon, users can use this option to change the frequency of sending unprovisioned device beacon. For example, if the value is 5, it means the unprovisioned device beacon will send every 5 seconds. When the option of BLE_MESH_FAST_PROV is selected, the value is better to be 3 seconds, or less.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PB_GATT

Provisioning support using GATT (PB-GATT)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to allow the device to be provisioned over GATT. This option should be enabled if PB-GATT is going to be used during provisioning procedure.

# Virtual option enabled whenever any Proxy protocol is needed

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROXY

BLE Mesh Proxy protocol support

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to support BLE Mesh Proxy protocol used by PB-GATT and other proxy pdu transmission.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_SERVER

BLE Mesh GATT Proxy Server

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option enables support for Mesh GATT Proxy Service, i.e. the ability to act as a proxy between a Mesh GATT Client and a Mesh network. This option should be enabled if a node is going to be a Proxy Server.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NODE_ID_TIMEOUT

Node Identity advertising timeout

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_SERVER

This option determines for how long the local node advertises using Node Identity. The given value is in seconds. The specification limits this to 60 seconds and lists it as the recommended value as well. So leaving the default value is the safest option. When an unprovisioned device is provisioned successfully and becomes a node, it will start to advertise using Node Identity during the time set by this option. And after that, Network ID will be advertised.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PROXY_FILTER_SIZE

Maximum number of filter entries per Proxy Client

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_SERVER

This option specifies how many Proxy Filter entries the local node supports. The entries of Proxy filter (whitelist or blacklist) are used to store a list of addresses which can be used to decide which messages will be forwarded to the Proxy Client by the Proxy Server.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GATT_PROXY_CLIENT

BLE Mesh GATT Proxy Client

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option enables support for Mesh GATT Proxy Client. The Proxy Client can use the GATT bearer to send mesh messages to a node that supports the advertising bearer.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

Store BLE Mesh configuration persistently

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

When selected, the BLE Mesh stack will take care of storing/restoring the BLE Mesh configuration persistently in flash. If the device is a BLE Mesh node, when this option is enabled, the configuration of the device will be stored persistently, including unicast address, NetKey, AppKey, etc. And if the device is a BLE Mesh Provisioner, the information of the device will be stored persistently, including the information of provisioned nodes, NetKey, AppKey, etc.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_STORE_TIMEOUT

Delay (in seconds) before storing anything persistently

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This value defines in seconds how soon any pending changes are actually written into persistent storage (flash) after a change occurs. The option allows nodes to delay a certain period of time to save proper information to flash. The default value is 0, which means information will be stored immediately once there are updates.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SEQ_STORE_RATE

How often the sequence number gets updated in storage

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This value defines how often the local sequence number gets updated in persistent storage (i.e. flash). e.g. a value of 100 means that the sequence number will be stored to flash on every 100th increment. If the node sends messages very frequently a higher value makes more sense, whereas if the node sends infrequently a value as low as 0 (update storage for every increment) can make sense. When the stack gets initialized it will add sequence number to the last stored one, so that it starts off with a value that’s guaranteed to be larger than the last one used before power off.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RPL_STORE_TIMEOUT

Minimum frequency that the RPL gets updated in storage

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This value defines in seconds how soon the RPL (Replay Protection List) gets written to persistent storage after a change occurs. If the node receives messages frequently, then a large value is recommended. If the node receives messages rarely, then the value can be as low as 0 (which means the RPL is written into the storage immediately). Note that if the node operates in a security-sensitive case, and there is a risk of sudden power-off, then a value of 0 is strongly recommended. Otherwise, a power loss before RPL being written into the storage may introduce message replay attacks and system security will be in a vulnerable state.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS_BACKWARD_COMPATIBILITY

A specific option for settings backward compatibility

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

This option is created to solve the issue of failure in recovering node information after mesh stack updates. In the old version mesh stack, there is no key of “mesh/role” in nvs. In the new version mesh stack, key of “mesh/role” is added in nvs, recovering node information needs to check “mesh/role” key in nvs and implements selective recovery of mesh node information. Therefore, there may be failure in recovering node information during node restarting after OTA.

The new version mesh stack adds the option of “mesh/role” because we have added the support of storing Provisioner information, while the old version only supports storing node information.

If users are updating their nodes from old version to new version, we recommend enabling this option, so that system could set the flag in advance before recovering node information and make sure the node information recovering could work as expected.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SPECIFIC_PARTITION

Use a specific NVS partition for BLE Mesh

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

When selected, the mesh stack will use a specified NVS partition instead of default NVS partition. Note that the specified partition must be registered with NVS using nvs_flash_init_partition() API, and the partition must exists in the csv file. When Provisioner needs to store a large amount of nodes’ information in the flash (e.g. more than 20), this option is recommended to be enabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_PARTITION_NAME

Name of the NVS partition for BLE Mesh

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SPECIFIC_PARTITION

This value defines the name of the specified NVS partition used by the mesh stack.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_USE_MULTIPLE_NAMESPACE

Support using multiple NVS namespaces by Provisioner

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS

When selected, Provisioner can use different NVS namespaces to store different instances of mesh information. For example, if in the first room, Provisioner uses NetKey A, AppKey A and provisions three devices, these information will be treated as mesh information instance A. When the Provisioner moves to the second room, it uses NetKey B, AppKey B and provisions two devices, then the information will be treated as mesh information instance B. Here instance A and instance B will be stored in different namespaces. With this option enabled, Provisioner needs to use specific functions to open the corresponding NVS namespace, restore the mesh information, release the mesh information or erase the mesh information.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MAX_NVS_NAMESPACE

Maximum number of NVS namespaces

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SETTINGS > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_USE_MULTIPLE_NAMESPACE

This option specifies the maximum NVS namespaces supported by Provisioner.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SUBNET_COUNT

Maximum number of mesh subnets per network

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies how many subnets a Mesh network can have at the same time. Indeed, this value decides the number of the network keys which can be owned by a node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_APP_KEY_COUNT

Maximum number of application keys per network

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies how many application keys the device can store per network. Indeed, this value decides the number of the application keys which can be owned by a node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MODEL_KEY_COUNT

Maximum number of application keys per model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies the maximum number of application keys to which each model can be bound.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MODEL_GROUP_COUNT

Maximum number of group address subscriptions per model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies the maximum number of addresses to which each model can be subscribed.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LABEL_COUNT

Maximum number of Label UUIDs used for Virtual Addresses

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies how many Label UUIDs can be stored. Indeed, this value decides the number of the Virtual Addresses can be supported by a node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_CRPL

Maximum capacity of the replay protection list

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option specifies the maximum capacity of the replay protection list. It is similar to Network message cache size, but has a different purpose. The replay protection list is used to prevent a node from replay attack, which will store the source address and sequence number of the received mesh messages. For Provisioner, the replay protection list size should not be smaller than the maximum number of nodes whose information can be stored. And the element number of each node should also be taken into consideration. For example, if Provisioner can provision up to 20 nodes and each node contains two elements, then the replay protection list size of Provisioner should be at least 40.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_MSG_CACHE_SIZE

Network message cache size

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Number of messages that are cached for the network. This helps prevent unnecessary decryption operations and unnecessary relays. This option is similar to Replay protection list, but has a different purpose. A node is not required to cache the entire Network PDU and may cache only part of it for tracking, such as values for SRC/SEQ or others.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_ADV_BUF_COUNT

Number of advertising buffers

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Number of advertising buffers available. The transport layer reserves ADV_BUF_COUNT - 3 buffers for outgoing segments. The maximum outgoing SDU size is 12 times this value (out of which 4 or 8 bytes are used for the Transport Layer MIC). For example, 5 segments means the maximum SDU size is 60 bytes, which leaves 56 bytes for application layer data using a 4-byte MIC, or 52 bytes using an 8-byte MIC.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_IVU_DIVIDER

Divider for IV Update state refresh timer

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

When the IV Update state enters Normal operation or IV Update in Progress, we need to keep track of how many hours has passed in the state, since the specification requires us to remain in the state at least for 96 hours (Update in Progress has an additional upper limit of 144 hours).

In order to fulfill the above requirement, even if the node might be powered off once in a while, we need to store persistently how many hours the node has been in the state. This doesn’t necessarily need to happen every hour (thanks to the flexible duration range). The exact cadence will depend a lot on the ways that the node will be used and what kind of power source it has.

Since there is no single optimal answer, this configuration option allows specifying a divider, i.e. how many intervals the 96 hour minimum gets split into. After each interval the duration that the node has been in the current state gets stored to flash. E.g. the default value of 4 means that the state is saved every 24 hours (96 / 4).

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_IVU_RECOVERY_IVI

Recovery the IV index when the latest whole IV update procedure is missed

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

According to Section 3.10.5 of Mesh Specification v1.0.1. If a node in Normal Operation receives a Secure Network beacon with an IV index equal to the last known IV index+1 and the IV Update Flag set to 0, the node may update its IV without going to the IV Update in Progress state, or it may initiate an IV Index Recovery procedure (Section 3.10.6), or it may ignore the Secure Network beacon. The node makes the choice depending on the time since last IV update and the likelihood that the node has missed the Secure Network beacons with the IV update Flag. When the above situation is encountered, this option can be used to decide whether to perform the IV index recovery procedure.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TX_SEG_MSG_COUNT

Maximum number of simultaneous outgoing segmented messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum number of simultaneous outgoing multi-segment and/or reliable messages. The default value is 1, which means the device can only send one segmented message at a time. And if another segmented message is going to be sent, it should wait for the completion of the previous one. If users are going to send multiple segmented messages at the same time, this value should be configured properly.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RX_SEG_MSG_COUNT

Maximum number of simultaneous incoming segmented messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum number of simultaneous incoming multi-segment and/or reliable messages. The default value is 1, which means the device can only receive one segmented message at a time. And if another segmented message is going to be received, it should wait for the completion of the previous one. If users are going to receive multiple segmented messages at the same time, this value should be configured properly.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RX_SDU_MAX

Maximum incoming Upper Transport Access PDU length

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum incoming Upper Transport Access PDU length. Leave this to the default value, unless you really need to optimize memory usage.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TX_SEG_MAX

Maximum number of segments in outgoing messages

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Maximum number of segments supported for outgoing messages. This value should typically be fine-tuned based on what models the local node supports, i.e. what’s the largest message payload that the node needs to be able to send. This value affects memory and call stack consumption, which is why the default is lower than the maximum that the specification would allow (32 segments).

The maximum outgoing SDU size is 12 times this number (out of which 4 or 8 bytes is used for the Transport Layer MIC). For example, 5 segments means the maximum SDU size is 60 bytes, which leaves 56 bytes for application layer data using a 4-byte MIC and 52 bytes using an 8-byte MIC.

Be sure to specify a sufficient number of advertising buffers when setting this option to a higher value. There must be at least three more advertising buffers (BLE_MESH_ADV_BUF_COUNT) as there are outgoing segments.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY

Relay support

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Support for acting as a Mesh Relay Node. Enabling this option will allow a node to support the Relay feature, and the Relay feature can still be enabled or disabled by proper configuration messages. Disabling this option will let a node not support the Relay feature.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY_ADV_BUF

Use separate advertising buffers for relay packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY

When selected, self-send packets will be put in a high-priority queue and relay packets will be put in a low-priority queue.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY_ADV_BUF_COUNT

Number of advertising buffers for relay packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_RELAY_ADV_BUF

Number of advertising buffers for relay packets available.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Support for Low Power features

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to operate as a Low Power Node. If low power consumption is required by a node, this option should be enabled. And once the node enters the mesh network, it will try to find a Friend node and establish a friendship.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_ESTABLISHMENT

Perform Friendship establishment using low power

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Perform the Friendship establishment using low power with the help of a reduced scan duty cycle. The downside of this is that the node may miss out on messages intended for it until it has successfully set up Friendship with a Friend node. When this option is enabled, the node will stop scanning for a period of time after a Friend Request or Friend Poll is sent, so as to reduce more power consumption.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_AUTO

Automatically start looking for Friend nodes once provisioned

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Once provisioned, automatically enable LPN functionality and start looking for Friend nodes. If this option is disabled LPN mode needs to be manually enabled by calling bt_mesh_lpn_set(true). When an unprovisioned device is provisioned successfully and becomes a node, enabling this option will trigger the node starts to send Friend Request at a certain period until it finds a proper Friend node.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_AUTO_TIMEOUT

Time from last received message before going to LPN mode

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_AUTO

Time in seconds from the last received message, that the node waits out before starting to look for Friend nodes.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RETRY_TIMEOUT

Retry timeout for Friend requests

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Time in seconds between Friend Requests, if a previous Friend Request did not yield any acceptable Friend Offers.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RSSI_FACTOR

RSSIFactor, used in Friend Offer Delay calculation

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The contribution of the RSSI, measured by the Friend node, used in Friend Offer Delay calculations. 0 = 1, 1 = 1.5, 2 = 2, 3 = 2.5. RSSIFactor, one of the parameters carried by Friend Request sent by Low Power node, which is used to calculate the Friend Offer Delay.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RECV_WIN_FACTOR

ReceiveWindowFactor, used in Friend Offer Delay calculation

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The contribution of the supported Receive Window used in Friend Offer Delay calculations. 0 = 1, 1 = 1.5, 2 = 2, 3 = 2.5. ReceiveWindowFactor, one of the parameters carried by Friend Request sent by Low Power node, which is used to calculate the Friend Offer Delay.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_MIN_QUEUE_SIZE

Minimum size of the acceptable friend queue (MinQueueSizeLog)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The MinQueueSizeLog field is defined as log_2(N), where N is the minimum number of maximum size Lower Transport PDUs that the Friend node can store in its Friend Queue. As an example, MinQueueSizeLog value 1 gives N = 2, and value 7 gives N = 128.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_RECV_DELAY

Receive delay requested by the local node

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The ReceiveDelay is the time between the Low Power node sending a request and listening for a response. This delay allows the Friend node time to prepare the response. The value is in units of milliseconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_POLL_TIMEOUT

The value of the PollTimeout timer

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

PollTimeout timer is used to measure time between two consecutive requests sent by a Low Power node. If no requests are received the Friend node before the PollTimeout timer expires, then the friendship is considered terminated. The value is in units of 100 milliseconds, so e.g. a value of 300 means 30 seconds. The smaller the value, the faster the Low Power node tries to get messages from corresponding Friend node and vice versa.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_INIT_POLL_TIMEOUT

The starting value of the PollTimeout timer

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

The initial value of the PollTimeout timer when Friendship is to be established for the first time. After this, the timeout gradually grows toward the actual PollTimeout, doubling in value for each iteration. The value is in units of 100 milliseconds, so e.g. a value of 300 means 30 seconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_SCAN_LATENCY

Latency for enabling scanning

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Latency (in milliseconds) is the time it takes to enable scanning. In practice, it means how much time in advance of the Receive Window, the request to enable scanning is made.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_GROUPS

Number of groups the LPN can subscribe to

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Maximum number of groups to which the LPN can subscribe.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LPN_SUB_ALL_NODES_ADDR

Automatically subscribe all nodes address

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LOW_POWER

Automatically subscribe all nodes address when friendship established.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Support for Friend feature

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Enable this option to be able to act as a Friend Node.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_RECV_WIN

Friend Receive Window

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Receive Window in milliseconds supported by the Friend node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_QUEUE_SIZE

Minimum number of buffers supported per Friend Queue

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Minimum number of buffers available to be stored for each local Friend Queue. This option decides the size of each buffer which can be used by a Friend node to store messages for each Low Power node.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_SUB_LIST_SIZE

Friend Subscription List Size

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Size of the Subscription List that can be supported by a Friend node for a Low Power node. And Low Power node can send Friend Subscription List Add or Friend Subscription List Remove messages to the Friend node to add or remove subscription addresses.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_LPN_COUNT

Number of supported LPN nodes

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Number of Low Power Nodes with which a Friend can have Friendship simultaneously. A Friend node can have friendship with multiple Low Power nodes at the same time, while a Low Power node can only establish friendship with only one Friend node at the same time.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND_SEG_RX

Number of incomplete segment lists per LPN

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_FRIEND

Number of incomplete segment lists tracked for each Friends’ LPN. In other words, this determines from how many elements can segmented messages destined for the Friend queue be received simultaneously.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NO_LOG

Disable BLE Mesh debug logs (minimize bin size)

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Select this to save the BLE Mesh related rodata code size. Enabling this option will disable the output of BLE Mesh debug log.

Default value:
BLE Mesh STACK DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_STACK_TRACE_LEVEL

BLE_MESH_STACK

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh STACK DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BLE Mesh trace level for BLE Mesh stack.

Available options:

  • NONE (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • INFO (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_INFO)

  • DEBUG (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BLE_MESH_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

BLE Mesh NET BUF DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL

BLE_MESH_NET_BUF

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh NET BUF DEBUG LOG LEVEL

Define BLE Mesh trace level for BLE Mesh net buffer.

Available options:

  • NONE (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_NONE)

  • ERROR (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • WARNING (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_WARNING)

  • INFO (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_INFO)

  • DEBUG (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • VERBOSE (BLE_MESH_NET_BUF_TRACE_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_CLIENT_MSG_TIMEOUT

Timeout(ms) for client message response

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

Timeout value used by the node to get response of the acknowledged message which is sent by the client model. This value indicates the maximum time that a client model waits for the response of the sent acknowledged messages. If a client model uses 0 as the timeout value when sending acknowledged messages, then the default value will be used which is four seconds.

Range:
Default value:
Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_CFG_CLI

Configuration Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Enable support for Configuration Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_HEALTH_CLI

Health Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Enable support for Health Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_HEALTH_SRV

Health Server model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Foundation models

Enable support for Health Server model.

Default value:
Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_ONOFF_CLI

Generic OnOff Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic OnOff Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_LEVEL_CLI

Generic Level Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Level Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_DEF_TRANS_TIME_CLI

Generic Default Transition Time Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Default Transition Time Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_POWER_ONOFF_CLI

Generic Power OnOff Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Power OnOff Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_POWER_LEVEL_CLI

Generic Power Level Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Power Level Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_BATTERY_CLI

Generic Battery Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Battery Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_LOCATION_CLI

Generic Location Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Location Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_PROPERTY_CLI

Generic Property Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic Property Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SENSOR_CLI

Sensor Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Sensor Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TIME_CLI

Time Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Time Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SCENE_CLI

Scene Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Scene Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SCHEDULER_CLI

Scheduler Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Scheduler Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_LIGHTNESS_CLI

Light Lightness Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light Lightness Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_CTL_CLI

Light CTL Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light CTL Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_HSL_CLI

Light HSL Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light HSL Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_XYL_CLI

Light XYL Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light XYL Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHT_LC_CLI

Light LC Client model

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Light LC Client model.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_GENERIC_SERVER

Generic server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Generic server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SENSOR_SERVER

Sensor server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Sensor server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TIME_SCENE_SERVER

Time and Scenes server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Time and Scenes server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_LIGHTING_SERVER

Lighting server models

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > Support for BLE Mesh Client/Server models

Enable support for Lighting server models.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_IV_UPDATE_TEST

Test the IV Update Procedure

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH

This option removes the 96 hour limit of the IV Update Procedure and lets the state to be changed at any time. If IV Update test mode is going to be used, this option should be enabled.

Default value:
BLE Mesh specific test option

Contains:

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SELF_TEST

Perform BLE Mesh self-tests

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

This option adds extra self-tests which are run every time BLE Mesh networking is initialized.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TEST_AUTO_ENTER_NETWORK

Unprovisioned device enters mesh network automatically

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SELF_TEST

With this option enabled, an unprovisioned device can automatically enters mesh network using a specific test function without the pro- visioning procedure. And on the Provisioner side, a test function needs to be invoked to add the node information into the mesh stack.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_TEST_USE_WHITE_LIST

Use white list to filter mesh advertising packets

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SELF_TEST

With this option enabled, users can use white list to filter mesh advertising packets while scanning.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_SHELL

Enable BLE Mesh shell

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

Activate shell module that provides BLE Mesh commands to the console.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable BLE Mesh debug logs

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option

Enable debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

Default value:
CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_NET

Network layer debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Network layer debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_TRANS

Transport layer debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Transport layer debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_BEACON

Beacon debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Beacon-related debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_CRYPTO

Crypto debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable cryptographic debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_PROV

Provisioning debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Provisioning debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_ACCESS

Access layer debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Access layer debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_MODEL

Foundation model debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Foundation Models debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_ADV

Advertising debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable advertising debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_LOW_POWER

Low Power debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Low Power debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_FRIEND

Friend debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Friend debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG_PROXY

Proxy debug

Found in: Component config > CONFIG_BLE_MESH > BLE Mesh specific test option > CONFIG_BLE_MESH_DEBUG

Enable Proxy protocol debug logs for the BLE Mesh functionality.

CoAP Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_COAP_MBEDTLS_ENCRYPTION_MODE

CoAP Encryption method

Found in: Component config > CoAP Configuration

If the CoAP information is to be encrypted, the encryption environment can be set up in one of two ways (default being Pre-Shared key mode)

  • Encrypt using defined Pre-Shared Keys (PSK if uri includes coaps://)

  • Encrypt using defined Public Key Infrastructure (PKI if uri includes coaps://)

Available options:

  • Pre-Shared Keys (COAP_MBEDTLS_PSK)

  • PKI Certificates (COAP_MBEDTLS_PKI)

CONFIG_COAP_MBEDTLS_DEBUG

Enable CoAP debugging

Found in: Component config > CoAP Configuration

Enable CoAP debugging functions at compile time for the example code.

If this option is enabled, call coap_set_log_level() at runtime in order to enable CoAP debug output via the ESP log mechanism.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_COAP_MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL

Set CoAP debugging level

Found in: Component config > CoAP Configuration > CONFIG_COAP_MBEDTLS_DEBUG

Set CoAP debugging level

Available options:

  • Emergency (COAP_LOG_EMERG)

  • Alert (COAP_LOG_ALERT)

  • Critical (COAP_LOG_CRIT)

  • Error (COAP_LOG_ERROR)

  • Warning (COAP_LOG_WARNING)

  • Notice (COAP_LOG_NOTICE)

  • Info (COAP_LOG_INFO)

  • Debug (COAP_LOG_DEBUG)

Driver configurations

Contains:

ADC configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_ADC_FORCE_XPD_FSM

Use the FSM to control ADC power

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > ADC configuration

ADC power can be controlled by the FSM instead of software. This allows the ADC to be shut off when it is not working leading to lower power consumption. However using the FSM control ADC power will increase the noise of ADC.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ADC_DISABLE_DAC

Disable DAC when ADC2 is used on GPIO 25 and 26

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > ADC configuration

If this is set, the ADC2 driver will disable the output of the DAC corresponding to the specified channel. This is the default value.

For testing, disable this option so that we can measure the output of DAC by internal ADC.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

SPI configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_MASTER_IN_IRAM

Place transmitting functions of SPI master into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > SPI configuration

Normally only the ISR of SPI master is placed in the IRAM, so that it can work without the flash when interrupt is triggered. For other functions, there’s some possibility that the flash cache miss when running inside and out of SPI functions, which may increase the interval of SPI transactions. Enable this to put queue\_trans, get\_trans\_result and transmit functions into the IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

During unit test, this is enabled to measure the ideal case of api.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_MASTER_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place SPI master ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > SPI configuration

Place the SPI master ISR in to IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

Also you can forbid the ISR being disabled during flash writing access, by add ESP_INTR_FLAG_IRAM when initializing the driver.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_SLAVE_IN_IRAM

Place transmitting functions of SPI slave into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > SPI configuration

Normally only the ISR of SPI slave is placed in the IRAM, so that it can work without the flash when interrupt is triggered. For other functions, there’s some possibility that the flash cache miss when running inside and out of SPI functions, which may increase the interval of SPI transactions. Enable this to put queue\_trans, get\_trans\_result and transmit functions into the IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_SLAVE_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place SPI slave ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > SPI configuration

Place the SPI slave ISR in to IRAM to avoid possible cache miss.

Also you can forbid the ISR being disabled during flash writing access, by add ESP_INTR_FLAG_IRAM when initializing the driver.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

TWAI configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_TWAI_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place TWAI ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > TWAI configuration

Place the TWAI ISR in to IRAM. This will allow the ISR to avoid cache misses, and also be able to run whilst the cache is disabled (such as when writing to SPI Flash). Note that if this option is enabled: - Users should also set the ESP_INTR_FLAG_IRAM in the driver configuration structure when installing the driver (see docs for specifics). - Alert logging (i.e., setting of the TWAI_ALERT_AND_LOG flag) will have no effect.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_BUS_OFF_REC

Add SW workaround for REC change during bus-off

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > TWAI configuration

When the bus-off condition is reached, the REC should be reset to 0 and frozen (via LOM) by the driver’s ISR. However on the ESP32, there is an edge case where the REC will increase before the driver’s ISR can respond in time (e.g., due to the rapid occurrence of bus errors), thus causing the REC to be non-zero after bus-off. A non-zero REC can prevent bus-off recovery as the bus-off recovery condition is that both TEC and REC become 0. Enabling this option will add a workaround in the driver to forcibly reset REC to zero on reaching bus-off.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_TX_INTR_LOST

Add SW workaround for TX interrupt lost errata

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > TWAI configuration

On the ESP32, when a transmit interrupt occurs, and interrupt register is read on the same APB clock cycle, the transmit interrupt could be lost. Enabling this option will add a workaround that checks the transmit buffer status bit to recover any lost transmit interrupt.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_RX_FRAME_INVALID

Add SW workaround for invalid RX frame errata

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > TWAI configuration

On the ESP32, when receiving a data or remote frame, if a bus error occurs in the data or CRC field, the data of the next received frame could be invalid. Enabling this option will add a workaround that will reset the peripheral on detection of this errata condition. Note that if a frame is transmitted on the bus whilst the reset is ongoing, the message will not be receive by the peripheral sent on the bus during the reset, the message will be lost.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_RX_FIFO_CORRUPT

Add SW workaround for RX FIFO corruption errata

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > TWAI configuration

On the ESP32, when the RX FIFO overruns and the RX message counter maxes out at 64 messages, the entire RX FIFO is no longer recoverable. Enabling this option will add a workaround that resets the peripheral on detection of this errata condition. Note that if a frame is being sent on the bus during the reset bus during the reset, the message will be lost.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_TWAI_ERRATA_FIX_LISTEN_ONLY_DOM

Add SW workaround for listen only transmits dominant bit errata

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > TWAI configuration

When in the listen only mode, the TWAI controller must not influence the TWAI bus (i.e., must not send any dominant bits). However, while in listen only mode on the ESP32/ESP32-S2/ESP32-S3/ESP32-C3, the TWAI controller will still transmit dominant bits when it detects an error (i.e., as part of an active error frame). Enabling this option will add a workaround that forces the TWAI controller into an error passive state on initialization, thus preventing any dominant bits from being sent.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

UART configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_UART_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place UART ISR function into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > UART configuration

If this option is not selected, UART interrupt will be disabled for a long time and may cause data lost when doing spi flash operation.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

RTCIO configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_RTCIO_SUPPORT_RTC_GPIO_DESC

Support array rtc_gpio_desc for ESP32

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > RTCIO configuration

The the array rtc_gpio_desc will don’t compile by default. If this option is selected, the array rtc_gpio_desc can be compile. If user use this array, please enable this configuration.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

GPIO Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_GPIO_ESP32_SUPPORT_SWITCH_SLP_PULL

Support light sleep GPIO pullup/pulldown configuration for ESP32

Found in: Component config > Driver configurations > GPIO Configuration

This option is intended to fix the bug that ESP32 is not able to switch to configured pullup/pulldown mode in sleep. If this option is selected, chip will automatically emulate the behaviour of switching, and about 450B of source codes would be placed into IRAM.

eFuse Bit Manager

Contains:

CONFIG_EFUSE_CUSTOM_TABLE

Use custom eFuse table

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager

Allows to generate a structure for eFuse from the CSV file.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_EFUSE_CUSTOM_TABLE_FILENAME

Custom eFuse CSV file

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager > CONFIG_EFUSE_CUSTOM_TABLE

Name of the custom eFuse CSV filename. This path is evaluated relative to the project root directory.

Default value:
CONFIG_EFUSE_VIRTUAL

Simulate eFuse operations in RAM

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager

All read and writes operations are redirected to RAM instead of eFuse registers. If this option is set, all permanent changes (via eFuse) are disabled. Log output will state changes which would be applied, but they will not be.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_SELECTOR

Coding Scheme Compatibility

Found in: Component config > eFuse Bit Manager

Selector eFuse code scheme.

Available options:

  • None Only (EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_COMPAT_NONE)

  • 3/4 and None (EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_COMPAT_3_4)

  • Repeat, 3/4 and None (common table does not support it) (EFUSE_CODE_SCHEME_COMPAT_REPEAT)

ESP-TLS

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_LIBRARY_CHOOSE

Choose SSL/TLS library for ESP-TLS (See help for more Info)

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

The ESP-TLS APIs support multiple backend TLS libraries. Currently mbedTLS and WolfSSL are supported. Different TLS libraries may support different features and have different resource usage. Consult the ESP-TLS documentation in ESP-IDF Programming guide for more details.

Available options:

  • mbedTLS (ESP_TLS_USING_MBEDTLS)

  • wolfSSL (License info in wolfSSL directory README) (ESP_TLS_USING_WOLFSSL)

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_USE_SECURE_ELEMENT

Use Secure Element (ATECC608A) with ESP-TLS

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable use of Secure Element for ESP-TLS, this enables internal support for ATECC608A peripheral on ESPWROOM32SE, which can be used for TLS connection.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SERVER

Enable ESP-TLS Server

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable support for creating server side SSL/TLS session, available for mbedTLS as well as wolfSSL TLS library.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_PSK_VERIFICATION

Enable PSK verification

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable support for pre shared key ciphers, supported for both mbedTLS as well as wolfSSL TLS library.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_INSECURE

Allow potentially insecure options

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

You can enable some potentially insecure options. These options should only be used for testing pusposes. Only enable these options if you are very sure.

CONFIG_ESP_TLS_SKIP_SERVER_CERT_VERIFY

Skip server certificate verification by default (WARNING: ONLY FOR TESTING PURPOSE, READ HELP)

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS > CONFIG_ESP_TLS_INSECURE

After enabling this option the esp-tls client will skip the server certificate verification by default. Note that this option will only modify the default behaviour of esp-tls client regarding server cert verification. The default behaviour should only be applicable when no other option regarding the server cert verification is opted in the esp-tls config (e.g. crt_bundle_attach, use_global_ca_store etc.). WARNING : Enabling this option comes with a potential risk of establishing a TLS connection with a server which has a fake identity, provided that the server certificate is not provided either through API or other mechanism like ca_store etc.

CONFIG_ESP_WOLFSSL_SMALL_CERT_VERIFY

Enable SMALL_CERT_VERIFY

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enables server verification with Intermediate CA cert, does not authenticate full chain of trust upto the root CA cert (After Enabling this option client only needs to have Intermediate CA certificate of the server to authenticate server, root CA cert is not necessary).

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_TLS_USING_WOLFSSL

CONFIG_ESP_DEBUG_WOLFSSL

Enable debug logs for wolfSSL

Found in: Component config > ESP-TLS

Enable detailed debug prints for wolfSSL SSL library.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if ESP_TLS_USING_WOLFSSL

ESP32-specific

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_REV_MIN

Minimum Supported ESP32 Revision

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Required minimum chip revision. ESP-IDF will check for it and reject to boot if the chip revision fails the check. This ensures the chip used will have some modifications (features, or bugfixes).

The complied binary will only support chips above this revision, this will also help to reduce binary size.

Available options:

  • Rev v0.0 (ECO0) (ESP32_REV_MIN_0)

  • Rev v1.0 (ECO1) (ESP32_REV_MIN_1)

  • Rev v1.1 (ECO1.1) (ESP32_REV_MIN_1_1)

  • Rev v2.0 (ECO2) (ESP32_REV_MIN_2)

  • Rev v3.0 (ECO3) (ESP32_REV_MIN_3)

  • Rev v3.1 (ECO4) (ESP32_REV_MIN_3_1)

CONFIG_ESP32_REV_MAX_FULL_STR

Maximum Supported ESP32 Revision

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Available options:

  • Rev v3.99 (ESP32_REV_MAX_FULL_STR_OPT)

CONFIG_ESP32_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ

CPU frequency

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

CPU frequency to be set on application startup.

Available options:

  • 80 MHz (ESP32_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_80)

  • 160 MHz (ESP32_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_160)

  • 240 MHz (ESP32_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_240)

CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT

Support for external, SPI-connected RAM

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

This enables support for an external SPI RAM chip, connected in parallel with the main SPI flash chip.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_TYPE

Type of SPI RAM chip in use

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Available options:

  • Auto-detect (SPIRAM_TYPE_AUTO)

  • ESP-PSRAM16 or APS1604 (SPIRAM_TYPE_ESPPSRAM16)

  • ESP-PSRAM32 or IS25WP032 (SPIRAM_TYPE_ESPPSRAM32)

  • ESP-PSRAM64 or LY68L6400 (SPIRAM_TYPE_ESPPSRAM64)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_SPEED

Set RAM clock speed

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Select the speed for the SPI RAM chip. If SPI RAM is enabled, we only support three combinations of SPI speed mode we supported now:

  1. Flash SPI running at 40Mhz and RAM SPI running at 40Mhz

  2. Flash SPI running at 80Mhz and RAM SPI running at 40Mhz

  3. Flash SPI running at 80Mhz and RAM SPI running at 80Mhz

Note: If the third mode(80Mhz+80Mhz) is enabled for SPI RAM of type 32MBit, one of the HSPI/VSPI host will be occupied by the system. Which SPI host to use can be selected by the config item SPIRAM_OCCUPY_SPI_HOST. Application code should never touch HSPI/VSPI hardware in this case. The option to select 80MHz will only be visible if the flash SPI speed is also 80MHz. (ESPTOOLPY_FLASHFREQ_80M is true)

Available options:

  • 40MHz clock speed (SPIRAM_SPEED_40M)

  • 80MHz clock speed (SPIRAM_SPEED_80M)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_BOOT_INIT

Initialize SPI RAM during startup

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

If this is enabled, the SPI RAM will be enabled during initial boot. Unless you have specific requirements, you’ll want to leave this enabled so memory allocated during boot-up can also be placed in SPI RAM.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_IGNORE_NOTFOUND

Ignore PSRAM when not found

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > CONFIG_SPIRAM_BOOT_INIT

Normally, if psram initialization is enabled during compile time but not found at runtime, it is seen as an error making the CPU panic. If this is enabled, booting will complete but no PSRAM will be available.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_USE

SPI RAM access method

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

The SPI RAM can be accessed in multiple methods: by just having it available as an unmanaged memory region in the CPU’s memory map, by integrating it in the heap as ‘special’ memory needing heap_caps_malloc to allocate, or by fully integrating it making malloc() also able to return SPI RAM pointers.

Available options:

  • Integrate RAM into memory map (SPIRAM_USE_MEMMAP)

  • Make RAM allocatable using heap_caps_malloc(…, MALLOC_CAP_SPIRAM) (SPIRAM_USE_CAPS_ALLOC)

  • Make RAM allocatable using malloc() as well (SPIRAM_USE_MALLOC)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_MEMTEST

Run memory test on SPI RAM initialization

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Runs a rudimentary memory test on initialization. Aborts when memory test fails. Disable this for slightly faster startup.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_MALLOC_ALWAYSINTERNAL

Maximum malloc() size, in bytes, to always put in internal memory

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

If malloc() is capable of also allocating SPI-connected ram, its allocation strategy will prefer to allocate chunks less than this size in internal memory, while allocations larger than this will be done from external RAM. If allocation from the preferred region fails, an attempt is made to allocate from the non-preferred region instead, so malloc() will not suddenly fail when either internal or external memory is full.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_TRY_ALLOCATE_WIFI_LWIP

Try to allocate memories of WiFi and LWIP in SPIRAM firstly. If failed, allocate internal memory

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Try to allocate memories of WiFi and LWIP in SPIRAM firstly. If failed, try to allocate internal memory then.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_MALLOC_RESERVE_INTERNAL

Reserve this amount of bytes for data that specifically needs to be in DMA or internal memory

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Because the external/internal RAM allocation strategy is not always perfect, it sometimes may happen that the internal memory is entirely filled up. This causes allocations that are specifically done in internal memory, for example the stack for new tasks or memory to service DMA or have memory that’s also available when SPI cache is down, to fail. This option reserves a pool specifically for requests like that; the memory in this pool is not given out when a normal malloc() is called.

Set this to 0 to disable this feature.

Note that because FreeRTOS stacks are forced to internal memory, they will also use this memory pool; be sure to keep this in mind when adjusting this value.

Note also that the DMA reserved pool may not be one single contiguous memory region, depending on the configured size and the static memory usage of the app.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_ALLOW_BSS_SEG_EXTERNAL_MEMORY

Allow .bss segment placed in external memory

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

If enabled, variables with EXT_RAM_ATTR attribute will be placed in SPIRAM instead of internal DRAM. BSS section of lwip, net80211, pp, bt libraries will be automatically placed in SPIRAM. BSS sections from other object files and libraries can also be placed in SPIRAM through linker fragment scheme extram_bss.

Note that the variables placed in SPIRAM using EXT_RAM_ATTR will be zero initialized.

CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND

Enable workaround for bug in SPI RAM cache for Rev1 ESP32s

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Revision 1 of the ESP32 has a bug that can cause a write to PSRAM not to take place in some situations when the cache line needs to be fetched from external RAM and an interrupt occurs. This enables a fix in the compiler (-mfix-esp32-psram-cache-issue) that makes sure the specific code that is vulnerable to this will not be emitted.

This will also not use any bits of newlib that are located in ROM, opting for a version that is compiled with the workaround and located in flash instead.

The workaround is not required for ESP32 revision 3 and above.

Default value:
SPIRAM cache workaround debugging

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY

Workaround strategy

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > SPIRAM cache workaround debugging

Select the workaround strategy. Note that the strategy for precompiled libraries (libgcc, newlib, bt, wifi) is not affected by this selection.

Unless you know you need a different strategy, it’s suggested you stay with the default MEMW strategy. Note that DUPLDST can interfere with hardware encryption and this will be automatically disabled if this workaround is selected. ‘Insert nops’ is the workaround that was used in older esp-idf versions. This workaround still can cause faulty data transfers from/to SPI RAM in some situation.

Available options:

  • Insert memw after vulnerable instructions (default) (SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_MEMW)

  • Duplicate LD/ST for 32-bit, memw for 8/16 bit (SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST)

  • Insert nops between vulnerable loads/stores (old strategy, obsolete) (SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_NOPS)

CONFIG_SPIRAM_BANKSWITCH_ENABLE

Enable bank switching for >4MiB external RAM

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

The ESP32 only supports 4MiB of external RAM in its address space. The hardware does support larger memories, but these have to be bank-switched in and out of this address space. Enabling this allows you to reserve some MMU pages for this, which allows the use of the esp_himem api to manage these banks.

#Note that this is limited to 62 banks, as esp_spiram_writeback_cache needs some kind of mapping of #some banks below that mark to work. We cannot at this moment guarantee this to exist when himem is #enabled.

If spiram 2T mode is enabled, the size of 64Mbit psram will be changed as 32Mbit, so himem will be unusable.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_BANKSWITCH_RESERVE

Amount of 32K pages to reserve for bank switching

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > CONFIG_SPIRAM_BANKSWITCH_ENABLE

Select the amount of banks reserved for bank switching. Note that the amount of RAM allocatable with malloc/esp_heap_alloc_caps will decrease by 32K for each page reserved here.

Note that this reservation is only actually done if your program actually uses the himem API. Without any himem calls, the reservation is not done and the original amount of memory will be available to malloc/esp_heap_alloc_caps.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_ALLOW_STACK_EXTERNAL_MEMORY

Allow external memory as an argument to xTaskCreateStatic

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Because some bits of the ESP32 code environment cannot be recompiled with the cache workaround, normally tasks cannot be safely run with their stack residing in external memory; for this reason xTaskCreate and friends always allocate stack in internal memory and xTaskCreateStatic will check if the memory passed to it is in internal memory. If you have a task that needs a large amount of stack and does not call on ROM code in any way (no direct calls, but also no Bluetooth/WiFi), you can try to disable this and use xTaskCreateStatic to create the tasks stack in external memory.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_OCCUPY_SPI_HOST

SPI host to use for 32MBit PSRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

When both flash and PSRAM is working under 80MHz, and the PSRAM is of type 32MBit, one of the HSPI/VSPI host will be used to output the clock. Select which one to use here.

Available options:

  • HSPI host (SPI2) (SPIRAM_OCCUPY_HSPI_HOST)

  • VSPI host (SPI3) (SPIRAM_OCCUPY_VSPI_HOST)

  • Will not try to use any host, will abort if not able to use the PSRAM (SPIRAM_OCCUPY_NO_HOST)

PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-DOWD

Contains:

CONFIG_D0WD_PSRAM_CLK_IO

PSRAM CLK IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-DOWD

The PSRAM CLOCK IO can be any unused GPIO, user can config it based on hardware design. If user use 1.8V flash and 1.8V psram, this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_D0WD_PSRAM_CS_IO

PSRAM CS IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-DOWD

The PSRAM CS IO can be any unused GPIO, user can config it based on hardware design. If user use 1.8V flash and 1.8V psram, this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

Range:
Default value:
PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-D2WD

Contains:

CONFIG_D2WD_PSRAM_CLK_IO

PSRAM CLK IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-D2WD

User can config it based on hardware design. For ESP32-D2WD chip, the psram can only be 1.8V psram, so this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_D2WD_PSRAM_CS_IO

PSRAM CS IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-D2WD

User can config it based on hardware design. For ESP32-D2WD chip, the psram can only be 1.8V psram, so this value can only be one of 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17.

Range:
Default value:
PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-PICO

Contains:

CONFIG_PICO_PSRAM_CS_IO

PSRAM CS IO number

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config > PSRAM clock and cs IO for ESP32-PICO

The PSRAM CS IO can be any unused GPIO, user can config it based on hardware design.

For ESP32-PICO chip, the psram share clock with flash, so user do not need to configure the clock IO. For the reference hardware design, please refer to https://www.espressif.com/sites/default/files/documentation/esp32-pico-d4_datasheet_en.pdf

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_CUSTOM_SPIWP_SD3_PIN

Use custom SPI PSRAM WP(SD3) Pin when flash pins set in eFuse (read help)

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

This setting is only used if the SPI flash pins have been overridden by setting the eFuses SPI_PAD_CONFIG_xxx, and the SPI flash mode is DIO or DOUT.

When this is the case, the eFuse config only defines 3 of the 4 Quad I/O data pins. The WP pin (aka ESP32 pin “SD_DATA_3” or SPI flash pin “IO2”) is not specified in eFuse. The psram only has QPI mode, so a WP pin setting is necessary.

If this config item is set to N (default), the correct WP pin will be automatically used for any Espressif chip or module with integrated flash. If a custom setting is needed, set this config item to Y and specify the GPIO number connected to the WP pin.

When flash mode is set to QIO or QOUT, the PSRAM WP pin will be set the same as the SPI Flash WP pin configured in the bootloader.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_SPIWP_SD3_PIN

Custom SPI PSRAM WP(SD3) Pin

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

The option “Use custom SPI PSRAM WP(SD3) pin” must be set or this value is ignored

If burning a customized set of SPI flash pins in eFuse and using DIO or DOUT mode for flash, set this value to the GPIO number of the SPIRAM WP pin.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_SPIRAM_2T_MODE

Enable SPI PSRAM 2T mode

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_SPIRAM_SUPPORT > SPI RAM config

Enable this option to fix single bit errors inside 64Mbit PSRAM.

Some 64Mbit PSRAM chips have a hardware issue in the RAM which causes bit errors at multiple fixed bit positions.

Note: If this option is enabled, the 64Mbit PSRAM chip will appear to be 32Mbit in size. Applications will not be affected unless the use the esp_himem APIs, which are not supported in 2T mode.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_TRAX

Use TRAX tracing feature

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

The ESP32 contains a feature which allows you to trace the execution path the processor has taken through the program. This is stored in a chunk of 32K (16K for single-processor) of memory that can’t be used for general purposes anymore. Disable this if you do not know what this is.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_TRAX_TWOBANKS

Reserve memory for tracing both pro as well as app cpu execution

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_TRAX

The ESP32 contains a feature which allows you to trace the execution path the processor has taken through the program. This is stored in a chunk of 32K (16K for single-processor) of memory that can’t be used for general purposes anymore. Disable this if you do not know what this is.

# Memory to reverse for trace, used in linker script

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_UNIVERSAL_MAC_ADDRESSES

Number of universally administered (by IEEE) MAC address

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Configure the number of universally administered (by IEEE) MAC addresses. During initialization, MAC addresses for each network interface are generated or derived from a single base MAC address. If the number of universal MAC addresses is four, all four interfaces (WiFi station, WiFi softap, Bluetooth and Ethernet) receive a universally administered MAC address. These are generated sequentially by adding 0, 1, 2 and 3 (respectively) to the final octet of the base MAC address. If the number of universal MAC addresses is two, only two interfaces (WiFi station and Bluetooth) receive a universally administered MAC address. These are generated sequentially by adding 0 and 1 (respectively) to the base MAC address. The remaining two interfaces (WiFi softap and Ethernet) receive local MAC addresses. These are derived from the universal WiFi station and Bluetooth MAC addresses, respectively. When using the default (Espressif-assigned) base MAC address, either setting can be used. When using a custom universal MAC address range, the correct setting will depend on the allocation of MAC addresses in this range (either 2 or 4 per device.)

Available options:

  • Two (ESP32_UNIVERSAL_MAC_ADDRESSES_TWO)

  • Four (ESP32_UNIVERSAL_MAC_ADDRESSES_FOUR)

CONFIG_ESP32_ULP_COPROC_ENABLED

Enable Ultra Low Power (ULP) Coprocessor

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Set to ‘y’ if you plan to load a firmware for the coprocessor.

If this option is enabled, further coprocessor configuration will appear in the Components menu.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_ULP_COPROC_RESERVE_MEM

RTC slow memory reserved for coprocessor

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_ULP_COPROC_ENABLED

Bytes of memory to reserve for ULP coprocessor firmware & data.

Data is reserved at the beginning of RTC slow memory.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_DEBUG_OCDAWARE

Make exception and panic handlers JTAG/OCD aware

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

The FreeRTOS panic and unhandled exception handers can detect a JTAG OCD debugger and instead of panicking, have the debugger stop on the offending instruction.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET

Hardware brownout detect & reset

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

The ESP32 has a built-in brownout detector which can detect if the voltage is lower than a specific value. If this happens, it will reset the chip in order to prevent unintended behaviour.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL

Brownout voltage level

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET

The brownout detector will reset the chip when the supply voltage is approximately below this level. Note that there may be some variation of brownout voltage level between each ESP32 chip.

#The voltage levels here are estimates, more work needs to be done to figure out the exact voltages #of the brownout threshold levels.

Available options:

  • 2.43V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_0)

  • 2.48V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_1)

  • 2.58V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_2)

  • 2.62V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_3)

  • 2.67V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_4)

  • 2.70V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_5)

  • 2.77V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_6)

  • 2.80V +/- 0.05 (ESP32_BROWNOUT_DET_LVL_SEL_7)

CONFIG_ESP32_REDUCE_PHY_TX_POWER

Reduce PHY TX power when brownout reset

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

When brownout reset occurs, reduce PHY TX power to keep the code running

# Note about the use of “FRC1” name: currently FRC1 timer is not used for # high resolution timekeeping anymore. Instead the esp_timer API is used. # FRC1 name in the option name is kept for compatibility.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_TIME_SYSCALL

Timers used for gettimeofday function

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

This setting defines which hardware timers are used to implement ‘gettimeofday’ and ‘time’ functions in C library.

  • If both high-resolution and RTC timers are used, timekeeping will continue in deep sleep. Time will be reported at 1 microsecond resolution. This is the default, and the recommended option.

  • If only high-resolution timer is used, gettimeofday will provide time at microsecond resolution. Time will not be preserved when going into deep sleep mode.

  • If only RTC timer is used, timekeeping will continue in deep sleep, but time will be measured at 6.(6) microsecond resolution. Also the gettimeofday function itself may take longer to run.

  • If no timers are used, gettimeofday and time functions return -1 and set errno to ENOSYS.

  • When RTC is used for timekeeping, two RTC_STORE registers are used to keep time in deep sleep mode.

Available options:

  • RTC and high-resolution timer (ESP32_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_RTC_FRC1)

  • RTC (ESP32_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_RTC)

  • High-resolution timer (ESP32_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_FRC1)

  • None (ESP32_TIME_SYSCALL_USE_NONE)

CONFIG_ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC

RTC clock source

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Choose which clock is used as RTC clock source.

  • “Internal 150kHz oscillator” option provides lowest deep sleep current consumption, and does not require extra external components. However frequency stability with respect to temperature is poor, so time may drift in deep/light sleep modes.

  • “External 32kHz crystal” provides better frequency stability, at the expense of slightly higher (1uA) deep sleep current consumption.

  • “External 32kHz oscillator” allows using 32kHz clock generated by an external circuit. In this case, external clock signal must be connected to 32K_XN pin. Amplitude should be <1.2V in case of sine wave signal, and <1V in case of square wave signal. Common mode voltage should be 0.1 < Vcm < 0.5Vamp, where Vamp is the signal amplitude. Additionally, 1nF capacitor must be connected between 32K_XP pin and ground. 32K_XP pin can not be used as a GPIO in this case.

  • “Internal 8.5MHz oscillator divided by 256” option results in higher deep sleep current (by 5uA) but has better frequency stability than the internal 150kHz oscillator. It does not require external components.

Available options:

  • Internal 150kHz RC oscillator (ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_RC)

  • External 32kHz crystal (ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS)

  • External 32kHz oscillator at 32K_XN pin (ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_OSC)

  • Internal 8.5MHz oscillator, divided by 256 (~33kHz) (ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_8MD256)

CONFIG_ESP32_RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT_METHOD

Additional current for external 32kHz crystal

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

With some 32kHz crystal configurations, the X32N and X32P pins may not have enough drive strength to keep the crystal oscillating. Choose the method to provide additional current from touchpad 9 to the external 32kHz crystal. Note that the deep sleep current is slightly high (4-5uA) and the touchpad and the wakeup sources of both touchpad and ULP are not available in method 1 and method 2.

This problem is fixed in ESP32 ECO 3, so this workaround is not needed. Setting the project configuration to minimum revision ECO3 will disable this option, , allow all wakeup sources, and save some code size.

  • “None” option will not provide additional current to external crystal

  • “Method 1” option can’t ensure 100% to solve the external 32k crystal start failed issue, but the touchpad can work in this method.

  • “Method 2” option can solve the external 32k issue, but the touchpad can’t work in this method.

Available options:

  • None (ESP32_RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT_NONE)

  • Method 1 (ESP32_RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT)

  • Method 2 (ESP32_RTC_EXT_CRYST_ADDIT_CURRENT_V2)

CONFIG_ESP32_RTC_CLK_CAL_CYCLES

Number of cycles for RTC_SLOW_CLK calibration

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

When the startup code initializes RTC_SLOW_CLK, it can perform calibration by comparing the RTC_SLOW_CLK frequency with main XTAL frequency. This option sets the number of RTC_SLOW_CLK cycles measured by the calibration routine. Higher numbers increase calibration precision, which may be important for applications which spend a lot of time in deep sleep. Lower numbers reduce startup time.

When this option is set to 0, clock calibration will not be performed at startup, and approximate clock frequencies will be assumed:

  • 150000 Hz if internal RC oscillator is used as clock source. For this use value 1024.

  • 32768 Hz if the 32k crystal oscillator is used. For this use value 3000 or more. In case more value will help improve the definition of the launch of the crystal. If the crystal could not start, it will be switched to internal RC.

Range:

  • from 0 to 27000 if ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS || ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_OSC || ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_8MD256

  • from 0 to 32766

Default value:

  • 3000 if ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS || ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_OSC || ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_INT_8MD256

  • 1024

CONFIG_ESP32_RTC_XTAL_CAL_RETRY

Number of attempts to repeat 32k XTAL calibration

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Number of attempts to repeat 32k XTAL calibration before giving up and switching to the internal RC. Increase this option if the 32k crystal oscillator does not start and switches to internal RC.

Default value:

  • 1 if ESP32_RTC_CLK_SRC_EXT_CRYS

CONFIG_ESP32_DEEP_SLEEP_WAKEUP_DELAY

Extra delay in deep sleep wake stub (in us)

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

When ESP32 exits deep sleep, the CPU and the flash chip are powered on at the same time. CPU will run deep sleep stub first, and then proceed to load code from flash. Some flash chips need sufficient time to pass between power on and first read operation. By default, without any extra delay, this time is approximately 900us, although some flash chip types need more than that.

By default extra delay is set to 2000us. When optimizing startup time for applications which require it, this value may be reduced.

If you are seeing “flash read err, 1000” message printed to the console after deep sleep reset, try increasing this value.

Range:

  • from 0 to 5000

Default value:

  • 2000

CONFIG_ESP32_XTAL_FREQ_SEL

Main XTAL frequency

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

ESP32 currently supports the following XTAL frequencies:

  • 26 MHz

  • 40 MHz

Startup code can automatically estimate XTAL frequency. This feature uses the internal 8MHz oscillator as a reference. Because the internal oscillator frequency is temperature dependent, it is not recommended to use automatic XTAL frequency detection in applications which need to work at high ambient temperatures and use high-temperature qualified chips and modules.

Available options:

  • 40 MHz (ESP32_XTAL_FREQ_40)

  • 26 MHz (ESP32_XTAL_FREQ_26)

  • Autodetect (ESP32_XTAL_FREQ_AUTO)

CONFIG_ESP32_DISABLE_BASIC_ROM_CONSOLE

Permanently disable BASIC ROM Console

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

If set, the first time the app boots it will disable the BASIC ROM Console permanently (by burning an eFuse).

Otherwise, the BASIC ROM Console starts on reset if no valid bootloader is read from the flash.

(Enabling secure boot also disables the BASIC ROM Console by default.)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_NO_BLOBS

No Binary Blobs

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

If enabled, this disables the linking of binary libraries in the application build. Note that after enabling this Wi-Fi/Bluetooth will not work.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_COMPATIBLE_PRE_V2_1_BOOTLOADERS

App compatible with bootloaders before ESP-IDF v2.1

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Bootloaders before ESP-IDF v2.1 did less initialisation of the system clock. This setting needs to be enabled to build an app which can be booted by these older bootloaders.

If this setting is enabled, the app can be booted by any bootloader from IDF v1.0 up to the current version.

If this setting is disabled, the app can only be booted by bootloaders from IDF v2.1 or newer.

Enabling this setting adds approximately 1KB to the app’s IRAM usage.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_COMPATIBLE_PRE_V3_1_BOOTLOADERS

App compatible with bootloader and partition table before ESP-IDF v3.1

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

Partition tables before ESP-IDF V3.1 do not contain an MD5 checksum field, and the bootloader before ESP-IDF v3.1 cannot read a partition table that contains an MD5 checksum field.

Enable this option only if your app needs to boot on a bootloader and/or partition table that was generated from a version *before* ESP-IDF v3.1.

If this option and Flash Encryption are enabled at the same time, and any data partitions in the partition table are marked Encrypted, then the partition encrypted flag should be manually verified in the app before accessing the partition (see CVE-2021-27926).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_RTCDATA_IN_FAST_MEM

Place RTC_DATA_ATTR and RTC_RODATA_ATTR variables into RTC fast memory segment

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

This option allows to place .rtc_data and .rtc_rodata sections into RTC fast memory segment to free the slow memory region for ULP programs. This option depends on the CONFIG_FREERTOS_UNICORE option because RTC fast memory can be accessed only by PRO_CPU core.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_USE_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

Use fixed static RAM size

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

If this option is disabled, the DRAM part of the heap starts right after the .bss section, within the dram0_0 region. As a result, adding or removing some static variables will change the available heap size.

If this option is enabled, the DRAM part of the heap starts right after the dram0_0 region, where its length is set with ESP32_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

Fixed Static RAM size

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific > CONFIG_ESP32_USE_FIXED_STATIC_RAM_SIZE

RAM size dedicated for static variables (.data & .bss sections). Please note that the actual length will be reduced by BTDM_RESERVE_DRAM if Bluetooth controller is enabled.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_DPORT_DIS_INTERRUPT_LVL

Disable the interrupt level for the DPORT workarounds

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

To prevent interrupting DPORT workarounds, need to disable interrupt with a maximum used level in the system.

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_ESP32_IRAM_AS_8BIT_ACCESSIBLE_MEMORY

Enable IRAM as 8 bit accessible memory

Found in: Component config > ESP32-specific

If enabled, application can use IRAM as byte accessible region for storing data (Note: IRAM region cannot be used as task stack)

This is possible due to handling of exceptions LoadStoreError (3) and LoadStoreAlignmentError (9) Each unaligned read/write access will incur a penalty of maximum of 167 CPU cycles.

ADC-Calibration

Contains:

CONFIG_ADC_CAL_EFUSE_TP_ENABLE

Use Two Point Values

Found in: Component config > ADC-Calibration

Some ESP32s have Two Point calibration values burned into eFuse BLOCK3. This option will allow the ADC calibration component to characterize the ADC-Voltage curve using Two Point values if they are available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CAL_EFUSE_VREF_ENABLE

Use eFuse Vref

Found in: Component config > ADC-Calibration

Some ESP32s have Vref burned into eFuse BLOCK0. This option will allow the ADC calibration component to characterize the ADC-Voltage curve using eFuse Vref if it is available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ADC_CAL_LUT_ENABLE

Use Lookup Tables

Found in: Component config > ADC-Calibration

This option will allow the ADC calibration component to use Lookup Tables to correct for non-linear behavior in 11db attenuation. Other attenuations do not exhibit non-linear behavior hence will not be affected by this option.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Ethernet

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Support ESP32 internal EMAC controller

Found in: Component config > Ethernet

ESP32 integrates a 10/100M Ethernet MAC controller.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_PHY_INTERFACE

PHY interface

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Select the communication interface between MAC and PHY chip.

Available options:

  • Reduced Media Independent Interface (RMII) (ETH_PHY_INTERFACE_RMII)

  • Media Independent Interface (MII) (ETH_PHY_INTERFACE_MII)

CONFIG_ETH_RMII_CLK_MODE

RMII clock mode

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Select external or internal RMII clock.

Available options:

  • Input RMII clock from external (ETH_RMII_CLK_INPUT)

    MAC will get RMII clock from outside. Note that ESP32 only supports GPIO0 to input the RMII clock.

  • Output RMII clock from internal (ETH_RMII_CLK_OUTPUT)

    ESP32 can generate RMII clock by internal APLL. This clock can be routed to the external PHY device. ESP32 supports to route the RMII clock to GPIO0/16/17.

CONFIG_ETH_RMII_CLK_OUTPUT_GPIO0

Output RMII clock from GPIO0 (Experimental!)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

GPIO0 can be set to output a pre-divided PLL clock (test only!). Enabling this option will configure GPIO0 to output a 50MHz clock. In fact this clock doesn’t have directly relationship with EMAC peripheral. Sometimes this clock won’t work well with your PHY chip. You might need to add some extra devices after GPIO0 (e.g. inverter). Note that outputting RMII clock on GPIO0 is an experimental practice. If you want the Ethernet to work with WiFi, don’t select GPIO0 output mode for stability.

Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_RMII_CLK_OUT_GPIO

RMII clock GPIO number

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Set the GPIO number to output RMII Clock.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE

Ethernet DMA buffer size (Byte)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Set the size of each buffer used by Ethernet MAC DMA.

Range:

  • from 256 to 1600

Default value:

  • 512

CONFIG_ETH_DMA_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Amount of Ethernet DMA Rx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Number of DMA receive buffers. Each buffer’s size is ETH_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE. Larger number of buffers could increase throughput somehow.

Range:

  • from 3 to 30

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_ETH_DMA_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Amount of Ethernet DMA Tx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Number of DMA transmit buffers. Each buffer’s size is ETH_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE. Larger number of buffers could increase throughput somehow.

Range:

  • from 3 to 30

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_ETH_SOFT_FLOW_CONTROL

Enable software flow control

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_ESP32_EMAC

Ethernet MAC engine on ESP32 doesn’t feature a flow control logic. The MAC driver can perform a software flow control if you enable this option. Note that, if the RX buffer number is small, enabling software flow control will cause obvious performance loss.

Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_USE_SPI_ETHERNET

Support SPI to Ethernet Module

Found in: Component config > Ethernet

ESP-IDF can also support some SPI-Ethernet modules.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_SPI_ETHERNET_DM9051

Use DM9051

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_SPI_ETHERNET

DM9051 is a fast Ethernet controller with an SPI interface. It’s also integrated with a 10/100M PHY and MAC. Select this to enable DM9051 driver.

CONFIG_ETH_SPI_ETHERNET_W5500

Use W5500 (MAC RAW)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_SPI_ETHERNET

W5500 is a HW TCP/IP embedded Ethernet controller. TCP/IP stack, 10/100 Ethernet MAC and PHY are embedded in a single chip. However the driver in ESP-IDF only enables the RAW MAC mode, making it compatible with the software TCP/IP stack. Say yes to enable W5500 driver.

CONFIG_ETH_USE_OPENETH

Support OpenCores Ethernet MAC (for use with QEMU)

Found in: Component config > Ethernet

OpenCores Ethernet MAC driver can be used when an ESP-IDF application is executed in QEMU. This driver is not supported when running on a real chip.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ETH_OPENETH_DMA_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Number of Ethernet DMA Rx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_OPENETH

Number of DMA receive buffers, each buffer is 1600 bytes.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ETH_OPENETH_DMA_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Number of Ethernet DMA Tx buffers

Found in: Component config > Ethernet > CONFIG_ETH_USE_OPENETH

Number of DMA transmit buffers, each buffer is 1600 bytes.

Range:
Default value:

Event Loop Library

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_LOOP_PROFILING

Enable event loop profiling

Found in: Component config > Event Loop Library

Enables collections of statistics in the event loop library such as the number of events posted to/recieved by an event loop, number of callbacks involved, number of events dropped to to a full event loop queue, run time of event handlers, and number of times/run time of each event handler.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_POST_FROM_ISR

Support posting events from ISRs

Found in: Component config > Event Loop Library

Enable posting events from interrupt handlers.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_POST_FROM_IRAM_ISR

Support posting events from ISRs placed in IRAM

Found in: Component config > Event Loop Library > CONFIG_ESP_EVENT_POST_FROM_ISR

Enable posting events from interrupt handlers placed in IRAM. Enabling this option places API functions esp_event_post and esp_event_post_to in IRAM.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

GDB Stub

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_GDBSTUB_SUPPORT_TASKS

Enable listing FreeRTOS tasks through GDB Stub

Found in: Component config > GDB Stub

If enabled, GDBStub can supply the list of FreeRTOS tasks to GDB. Thread list can be queried from GDB using ‘info threads’ command. Note that if GDB task lists were corrupted, this feature may not work. If GDBStub fails, try disabling this feature.

CONFIG_ESP_GDBSTUB_MAX_TASKS

Maximum number of tasks supported by GDB Stub

Found in: Component config > GDB Stub > CONFIG_ESP_GDBSTUB_SUPPORT_TASKS

Set the number of tasks which GDB Stub will support.

Default value:

ESP HTTP client

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_HTTP_CLIENT_ENABLE_HTTPS

Enable https

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTP client

This option will enable https protocol by linking esp-tls library and initializing SSL transport

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_HTTP_CLIENT_ENABLE_BASIC_AUTH

Enable HTTP Basic Authentication

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTP client

This option will enable HTTP Basic Authentication. It is disabled by default as Basic auth uses unencrypted encoding, so it introduces a vulnerability when not using TLS

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

HTTP Server

Contains:

CONFIG_HTTPD_MAX_REQ_HDR_LEN

Max HTTP Request Header Length

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the maximum supported size of headers section in HTTP request packet to be processed by the server

Default value:

  • 512

CONFIG_HTTPD_MAX_URI_LEN

Max HTTP URI Length

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the maximum supported size of HTTP request URI to be processed by the server

Default value:

  • 512

CONFIG_HTTPD_ERR_RESP_NO_DELAY

Use TCP_NODELAY socket option when sending HTTP error responses

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

Using TCP_NODEALY socket option ensures that HTTP error response reaches the client before the underlying socket is closed. Please note that turning this off may cause multiple test failures

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_HTTPD_PURGE_BUF_LEN

Length of temporary buffer for purging data

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the size of the temporary buffer used to receive and discard any remaining data that is received from the HTTP client in the request, but not processed as part of the server HTTP request handler.

If the remaining data is larger than the available buffer size, the buffer will be filled in multiple iterations. The buffer should be small enough to fit on the stack, but large enough to avoid excessive iterations.

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_HTTPD_LOG_PURGE_DATA

Log purged content data at Debug level

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

Enabling this will log discarded binary HTTP request data at Debug level. For large content data this may not be desirable as it will clutter the log.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_HTTPD_WS_SUPPORT

WebSocket server support

Found in: Component config > HTTP Server

This sets the WebSocket server support.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

ESP HTTPS OTA

Contains:

CONFIG_OTA_ALLOW_HTTP

Allow HTTP for OTA (WARNING: ONLY FOR TESTING PURPOSE, READ HELP)

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTPS OTA

It is highly recommended to keep HTTPS (along with server certificate validation) enabled. Enabling this option comes with potential risk of: - Non-encrypted communication channel with server - Accepting firmware upgrade image from server with fake identity

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

ESP HTTPS server

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_HTTPS_SERVER_ENABLE

Enable ESP_HTTPS_SERVER component

Found in: Component config > ESP HTTPS server

Enable ESP HTTPS server component

ESP NETIF Adapter

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_IP_LOST_TIMER_INTERVAL

IP Address lost timer interval (seconds)

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

The value of 0 indicates the IP lost timer is disabled, otherwise the timer is enabled.

The IP address may be lost because of some reasons, e.g. when the station disconnects from soft-AP, or when DHCP IP renew fails etc. If the IP lost timer is enabled, it will be started everytime the IP is lost. Event SYSTEM_EVENT_STA_LOST_IP will be raised if the timer expires. The IP lost timer is stopped if the station get the IP again before the timer expires.

Range:

  • from 0 to 65535

Default value:

  • 120

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_USE_TCPIP_STACK_LIB

TCP/IP Stack Library

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

Choose the TCP/IP Stack to work, for example, LwIP, uIP, etc.

Available options:

  • LwIP (ESP_NETIF_TCPIP_LWIP)

    lwIP is a small independent implementation of the TCP/IP protocol suite.

  • Loopback (ESP_NETIF_LOOPBACK)

    Dummy implementation of esp-netif functionality which connects driver transmit to receive function. This option is for testing purpose only

CONFIG_ESP_NETIF_TCPIP_ADAPTER_COMPATIBLE_LAYER

Enable backward compatible tcpip_adapter interface

Found in: Component config > ESP NETIF Adapter

Backward compatible interface to tcpip_adapter is enabled by default to support legacy TCP/IP stack initialisation code. Disable this option to use only esp-netif interface.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Power Management

Contains:

CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

Support for power management

Found in: Component config > Power Management

If enabled, application is compiled with support for power management. This option has run-time overhead (increased interrupt latency, longer time to enter idle state), and it also reduces accuracy of RTOS ticks and timers used for timekeeping. Enable this option if application uses power management APIs.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_PM_DFS_INIT_AUTO

Enable dynamic frequency scaling (DFS) at startup

Found in: Component config > Power Management > CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

If enabled, startup code configures dynamic frequency scaling. Max CPU frequency is set to DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ setting, min frequency is set to XTAL frequency. If disabled, DFS will not be active until the application configures it using esp_pm_configure function.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_USE_RTC_TIMER_REF

Use RTC timer to prevent time drift (EXPERIMENTAL)

Found in: Component config > Power Management > CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

When APB clock frequency changes, high-resolution timer (esp_timer) scale and base value need to be adjusted. Each adjustment may cause small error, and over time such small errors may cause time drift. If this option is enabled, RTC timer will be used as a reference to compensate for the drift. It is recommended that this option is only used if 32k XTAL is selected as RTC clock source.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_PROFILING

Enable profiling counters for PM locks

Found in: Component config > Power Management > CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

If enabled, esp_pm_* functions will keep track of the amount of time each of the power management locks has been held, and esp_pm_dump_locks function will print this information. This feature can be used to analyze which locks are preventing the chip from going into a lower power state, and see what time the chip spends in each power saving mode. This feature does incur some run-time overhead, so should typically be disabled in production builds.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_TRACE

Enable debug tracing of PM using GPIOs

Found in: Component config > Power Management > CONFIG_PM_ENABLE

If enabled, some GPIOs will be used to signal events such as RTOS ticks, frequency switching, entry/exit from idle state. Refer to pm_trace.c file for the list of GPIOs. This feature is intended to be used when analyzing/debugging behavior of power management implementation, and should be kept disabled in applications.

Default value:
CONFIG_PM_SLP_IRAM_OPT

Put lightsleep related codes in internal RAM

Found in: Component config > Power Management

If enabled, about 1.8KB of lightsleep related source code would be in IRAM and chip would sleep longer for 760us at most each time. This feature is intended to be used when lower power consumption is needed while there is enough place in IRAM to place source code.

CONFIG_PM_RTOS_IDLE_OPT

Put RTOS IDLE related codes in internal RAM

Found in: Component config > Power Management

If enabled, about 260B of RTOS_IDLE related source code would be in IRAM and chip would sleep longer for 40us at most each time. This feature is intended to be used when lower power consumption is needed while there is enough place in IRAM to place source code.

CONFIG_PM_SLP_DISABLE_GPIO

Disable all GPIO when chip at sleep

Found in: Component config > Power Management

This feature is intended to disable all GPIO pins at automantic sleep to get a lower power mode. If enabled, chips will disable all GPIO pins at automantic sleep to reduce about 200~300 uA current. If you want to specifically use some pins normally as chip wakes when chip sleeps, you can call ‘gpio_sleep_sel_dis’ to disable this feature on those pins. You can also keep this feature on and call ‘gpio_sleep_set_direction’ and ‘gpio_sleep_set_pull_mode’ to have a different GPIO configuration at sleep. Waring: If you want to enable this option on ESP32, you should enable GPIO_ESP32_SUPPORT_SWITCH_SLP_PULL at first, otherwise you will not be able to switch pullup/pulldown mode.

ESP System Settings

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC

Panic handler behaviour

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

If FreeRTOS detects unexpected behaviour or an unhandled exception, the panic handler is invoked. Configure the panic handler’s action here.

Available options:

  • Print registers and halt (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_PRINT_HALT)

    Outputs the relevant registers over the serial port and halt the processor. Needs a manual reset to restart.

  • Print registers and reboot (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_PRINT_REBOOT)

    Outputs the relevant registers over the serial port and immediately reset the processor.

  • Silent reboot (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_SILENT_REBOOT)

    Just resets the processor without outputting anything

  • Invoke GDBStub (ESP_SYSTEM_PANIC_GDBSTUB)

    Invoke gdbstub on the serial port, allowing for gdb to attach to it to do a postmortem of the crash.

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_RTC_EXT_XTAL_BOOTSTRAP_CYCLES

Bootstrap cycles for external 32kHz crystal

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

To reduce the startup time of an external RTC crystal, we bootstrap it with a 32kHz square wave for a fixed number of cycles. Setting 0 will disable bootstrapping (if disabled, the crystal may take longer to start up or fail to oscillate under some conditions).

If this value is too high, a faulty crystal may initially start and then fail. If this value is too low, an otherwise good crystal may not start.

To accurately determine if the crystal has started, set a larger “Number of cycles for RTC_SLOW_CLK calibration” (about 3000).

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_ALLOW_RTC_FAST_MEM_AS_HEAP

Enable RTC fast memory for dynamic allocations

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

This config option allows to add RTC fast memory region to system heap with capability similar to that of DRAM region but without DMA. This memory will be consumed first per heap initialization order by early startup services and scheduler related code. Speed wise RTC fast memory operates on APB clock and hence does not have much performance impact.

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_PD_FLASH

PD flash at light sleep when there is no SPIRAM

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

If enabled, chip will try to power down flash at light sleep, which costs more time when chip wakes up. Can only be enabled if there is no SPIRAM configured. This option will in fact consider VDD_SDIO auto power value (ESP_PD_OPTION_AUTO) as OFF. Also, it is possible to force a power domain to stay ON during light sleep by using esp_sleep_pd_config() function.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_PSRAM_LEAKAGE_WORKAROUND

PSRAM leakage current workaround in light sleep

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

When the CS pin of SPIRAM is not pulled up, the sleep current will increase during light sleep. If the CS pin of SPIRAM has an external pull-up, you do not need to select this option, otherwise, you should enable this option.

CONFIG_ESP_SYSTEM_FLASH_LEAKAGE_WORKAROUND

Flash leakage current workaround in light sleep

Found in: Component config > ESP System Settings

When the CS pin of Flash is not pulled up, the sleep current will increase during light sleep. If the CS pin of Flash has an external pull-up, you do not need to select this option, otherwise, you should enable this option.

RTC Clock Config
Memory protection

High resolution timer (esp_timer)

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_TIMER_PROFILING

Enable esp_timer profiling features

Found in: Component config > High resolution timer (esp_timer)

If enabled, esp_timer_dump will dump information such as number of times the timer was started, number of times the timer has triggered, and the total time it took for the callback to run. This option has some effect on timer performance and the amount of memory used for timer storage, and should only be used for debugging/testing purposes.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP_TIMER_TASK_STACK_SIZE

High-resolution timer task stack size

Found in: Component config > High resolution timer (esp_timer)

Configure the stack size of “timer_task” task. This task is used to dispatch callbacks of timers created using ets_timer and esp_timer APIs. If you are seing stack overflow errors in timer task, increase this value.

Note that this is not the same as FreeRTOS timer task. To configure FreeRTOS timer task size, see “FreeRTOS timer task stack size” option in “FreeRTOS” menu.

Range:

  • from 2048 to 65536

Default value:

  • 3584

CONFIG_ESP_TIMER_IMPL

Hardware timer to use for esp_timer

Found in: Component config > High resolution timer (esp_timer)

esp_timer APIs can be implemented using different hardware timers.

  • “FRC2 (legacy)” implementation has been used in ESP-IDF v2.x - v4.1.

  • “LAC timer of Timer Group 0” implementation is simpler, and has smaller run time overhead because software handling of timer overflow is not needed.

  • “SYSTIMER” implementation is similar to “LAC timer of Timer Group 0” but for non ESP32 chips.

Available options:

  • FRC2 (legacy) timer (ESP_TIMER_IMPL_FRC2)

  • LAC timer of Timer Group 0 (ESP_TIMER_IMPL_TG0_LAC)

  • SYSTIMER (ESP_TIMER_IMPL_SYSTIMER)

Wi-Fi

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_SW_COEXIST_ENABLE

Software controls WiFi/Bluetooth coexistence

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

If enabled, WiFi & Bluetooth coexistence is controlled by software rather than hardware. Recommended for heavy traffic scenarios. Both coexistence configuration options are automatically managed, no user intervention is required. If only Bluetooth is used, it is recommended to disable this option to reduce binary file size.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi static RX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi static RX buffers. Each buffer takes approximately 1.6KB of RAM. The static rx buffers are allocated when esp_wifi_init is called, they are not freed until esp_wifi_deinit is called.

WiFi hardware use these buffers to receive all 802.11 frames. A higher number may allow higher throughput but increases memory use. If ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_RX_ENABLED is enabled, this value is recommended to set equal or bigger than ESP32_WIFI_RX_BA_WIN in order to achieve better throughput and compatibility with both stations and APs.

Range:

  • from 2 to 25

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_DYNAMIC_RX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi dynamic RX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi dynamic RX buffers, 0 means unlimited RX buffers will be allocated (provided sufficient free RAM). The size of each dynamic RX buffer depends on the size of the received data frame.

For each received data frame, the WiFi driver makes a copy to an RX buffer and then delivers it to the high layer TCP/IP stack. The dynamic RX buffer is freed after the higher layer has successfully received the data frame.

For some applications, WiFi data frames may be received faster than the application can process them. In these cases we may run out of memory if RX buffer number is unlimited (0).

If a dynamic RX buffer limit is set, it should be at least the number of static RX buffers.

Range:
Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_TX_BUFFER

Type of WiFi TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select type of WiFi TX buffers:

If “Static” is selected, WiFi TX buffers are allocated when WiFi is initialized and released when WiFi is de-initialized. The size of each static TX buffer is fixed to about 1.6KB.

If “Dynamic” is selected, each WiFi TX buffer is allocated as needed when a data frame is delivered to the Wifi driver from the TCP/IP stack. The buffer is freed after the data frame has been sent by the WiFi driver. The size of each dynamic TX buffer depends on the length of each data frame sent by the TCP/IP layer.

If PSRAM is enabled, “Static” should be selected to guarantee enough WiFi TX buffers. If PSRAM is disabled, “Dynamic” should be selected to improve the utilization of RAM.

Available options:

  • Static (ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER)

  • Dynamic (ESP32_WIFI_DYNAMIC_TX_BUFFER)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi static TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi static TX buffers. Each buffer takes approximately 1.6KB of RAM. The static RX buffers are allocated when esp_wifi_init() is called, they are not released until esp_wifi_deinit() is called.

For each transmitted data frame from the higher layer TCP/IP stack, the WiFi driver makes a copy of it in a TX buffer. For some applications especially UDP applications, the upper layer can deliver frames faster than WiFi layer can transmit. In these cases, we may run out of TX buffers.

Range:

  • from 1 to 64 if ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER

Default value:

  • 16 if ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_TX_BUFFER

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_CACHE_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi cache TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi cache TX buffer number.

For each TX packet from uplayer, such as LWIP etc, WiFi driver needs to allocate a static TX buffer and makes a copy of uplayer packet. If WiFi driver fails to allocate the static TX buffer, it caches the uplayer packets to a dedicated buffer queue, this option is used to configure the size of the cached TX queue.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_DYNAMIC_TX_BUFFER_NUM

Max number of WiFi dynamic TX buffers

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi dynamic TX buffers. The size of each dynamic TX buffer is not fixed, it depends on the size of each transmitted data frame.

For each transmitted frame from the higher layer TCP/IP stack, the WiFi driver makes a copy of it in a TX buffer. For some applications, especially UDP applications, the upper layer can deliver frames faster than WiFi layer can transmit. In these cases, we may run out of TX buffers.

Range:

  • from 1 to 128

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_CSI_ENABLED

WiFi CSI(Channel State Information)

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable CSI(Channel State Information) feature. CSI takes about CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_STATIC_RX_BUFFER_NUM KB of RAM. If CSI is not used, it is better to disable this feature in order to save memory.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_TX_ENABLED

WiFi AMPDU TX

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable AMPDU TX feature

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_TX_BA_WIN

WiFi AMPDU TX BA window size

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_TX_ENABLED

Set the size of WiFi Block Ack TX window. Generally a bigger value means higher throughput but more memory. Most of time we should NOT change the default value unless special reason, e.g. test the maximum UDP TX throughput with iperf etc. For iperf test in shieldbox, the recommended value is 9~12.

Range:

  • from 2 to 32

Default value:

  • 6

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_RX_ENABLED

WiFi AMPDU RX

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable AMPDU RX feature

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_RX_BA_WIN

WiFi AMPDU RX BA window size

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMPDU_RX_ENABLED

Set the size of WiFi Block Ack RX window. Generally a bigger value means higher throughput and better compatibility but more memory. Most of time we should NOT change the default value unless special reason, e.g. test the maximum UDP RX throughput with iperf etc. For iperf test in shieldbox, the recommended value is 9~12. If PSRAM is used and WiFi memory is prefered to allocat in PSRAM first, the default and minimum value should be 16 to achieve better throughput and compatibility with both stations and APs.

Range:

  • from 2 to 32

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_AMSDU_TX_ENABLED

WiFi AMSDU TX

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable AMSDU TX feature

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_NVS_ENABLED

WiFi NVS flash

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable WiFi NVS flash

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_TASK_CORE_ID

WiFi Task Core ID

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Pinned WiFi task to core 0 or core 1.

Available options:

  • Core 0 (ESP32_WIFI_TASK_PINNED_TO_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (ESP32_WIFI_TASK_PINNED_TO_CORE_1)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_SOFTAP_BEACON_MAX_LEN

Max length of WiFi SoftAP Beacon

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

ESP-MESH utilizes beacon frames to detect and resolve root node conflicts (see documentation). However the default length of a beacon frame can simultaneously hold only five root node identifier structures, meaning that a root node conflict of up to five nodes can be detected at one time. In the occurence of more root nodes conflict involving more than five root nodes, the conflict resolution process will detect five of the root nodes, resolve the conflict, and re-detect more root nodes. This process will repeat until all root node conflicts are resolved. However this process can generally take a very long time.

To counter this situation, the beacon frame length can be increased such that more root nodes can be detected simultaneously. Each additional root node will require 36 bytes and should be added ontop of the default beacon frame length of 752 bytes. For example, if you want to detect 10 root nodes simultaneously, you need to set the beacon frame length as 932 (752+36*5).

Setting a longer beacon length also assists with debugging as the conflicting root nodes can be identified more quickly.

Range:

  • from 752 to 1256

Default value:

  • 752

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_MGMT_SBUF_NUM

WiFi mgmt short buffer number

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Set the number of WiFi management short buffer.

Range:

  • from 6 to 32

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL

WiFi default log level

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Specify how much output to see in logs by default. You can set lower verbosity level at runtime using esp_log_level_set function.

Note that this setting limits which log statements are compiled into the program. So setting this to, say, “Warning” would mean that changing log level to “Debug” at runtime will not be possible.

Available options:

  • No output (WIFI_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error (WIFI_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning (WIFI_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (WIFI_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (WIFI_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (WIFI_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_IRAM_OPT

WiFi IRAM speed optimization

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to place frequently called Wi-Fi library functions in IRAM. When this option is disabled, more than 10Kbytes of IRAM memory will be saved but Wi-Fi throughput will be reduced.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_RX_IRAM_OPT

WiFi RX IRAM speed optimization

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to place frequently called Wi-Fi library RX functions in IRAM. When this option is disabled, more than 17Kbytes of IRAM memory will be saved but Wi-Fi performance will be reduced.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_WIFI_ENABLE_WPA3_SAE

Enable WPA3-Personal

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to allow the device to establish a WPA3-Personal connection with eligible AP’s. PMF (Protected Management Frames) is a prerequisite feature for a WPA3 connection, it needs to be explicitly configured before attempting connection. Please refer to the Wi-Fi Driver API Guide for details.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_IRAM_OPT

WiFi SLP IRAM speed optimization

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to place called Wi-Fi library TBTT process and receive beacon functions in IRAM. Some functions can be put in IRAM either by ESP32_WIFI_IRAM_OPT and ESP32_WIFI_RX_IRAM_OPT, or this one. If already enabled ESP32_WIFI_IRAM_OPT, the other 7.3KB IRAM memory would be taken by this option. If already enabled ESP32_WIFI_RX_IRAM_OPT, the other 1.3KB IRAM memory would be taken by this option. If neither of them are enabled, the other 7.4KB IRAM memory would be taken by this option. Wi-Fi power-save mode average current would be reduced if this option is enabled.

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_DEFAULT_MIN_ACTIVE_TIME

Minimum active time

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_IRAM_OPT

The minimum timeout for waiting to receive data, unit: milliseconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_DEFAULT_MAX_ACTIVE_TIME

Maximum keep alive time

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_IRAM_OPT

The maximum time that wifi keep alive, unit: seconds.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_STA_DISCONNECTED_PM_ENABLE

Power Management for station at disconnected

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Select this option to enable power_management for station when disconnected. Chip will do modem-sleep when rf module is not in use any more.

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Wifi sleep optimize when beacon lost

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi

Enable wifi sleep optimization when beacon loss occurs and immediately enter sleep mode when the WiFi module detects beacon loss.

CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_TIMEOUT

Beacon loss timeout

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Timeout time for close rf phy when beacon loss occurs, Unit: 1024 microsecond.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_THRESHOLD

Maximum number of consecutive lost beacons allowed

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Maximum number of consecutive lost beacons allowed, WiFi keeps Rx state when the number of consecutive beacons lost is greater than the given threshold.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_PHY_ON_DELTA_EARLY_TIME

Delta early time for RF PHY on

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Delta early time for rf phy on, When the beacon is lost, the next rf phy on will be earlier the time specified by the configuration item, Unit: 32 microsecond.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_PHY_OFF_DELTA_TIMEOUT_TIME

Delta timeout time for RF PHY off

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi > CONFIG_ESP_WIFI_SLP_BEACON_LOST_OPT

Delta timeout time for rf phy off, When the beacon is lost, the next rf phy off will be delayed for the time specified by the configuration item. Unit: 1024 microsecond.

Range:
Default value:

PHY

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_CALIBRATION_AND_DATA_STORAGE

Store phy calibration data in NVS

Found in: Component config > PHY

If this option is enabled, NVS will be initialized and calibration data will be loaded from there. PHY calibration will be skipped on deep sleep wakeup. If calibration data is not found, full calibration will be performed and stored in NVS. Normally, only partial calibration will be performed. If this option is disabled, full calibration will be performed.

If it’s easy that your board calibrate bad data, choose ‘n’. Two cases for example, you should choose ‘n’: 1.If your board is easy to be booted up with antenna disconnected. 2.Because of your board design, each time when you do calibration, the result are too unstable. If unsure, choose ‘y’.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION

Use a partition to store PHY init data

Found in: Component config > PHY

If enabled, PHY init data will be loaded from a partition. When using a custom partition table, make sure that PHY data partition is included (type: ‘data’, subtype: ‘phy’). With default partition tables, this is done automatically. If PHY init data is stored in a partition, it has to be flashed there, otherwise runtime error will occur.

If this option is not enabled, PHY init data will be embedded into the application binary.

If unsure, choose ‘n’.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_DEFAULT_INIT_IF_INVALID

Reset default PHY init data if invalid

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION

If enabled, PHY init data will be restored to default if it cannot be verified successfully to avoid endless bootloops.

If unsure, choose ‘n’.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_SUPPORT_MULTIPLE_PHY_INIT_DATA_BIN

Support multiple PHY init data bin

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION

If enabled, the corresponding PHY init data type can be automatically switched according to the country code. China’s PHY init data bin is used by default. Can be modified by country information in API esp_wifi_set_country(). The priority of switching the PHY init data type is: 1. Country configured by API esp_wifi_set_country() and the parameter policy is WIFI_COUNTRY_POLICY_MANUAL. 2. Country notified by the connected AP. 3. Country configured by API esp_wifi_set_country() and the parameter policy is WIFI_COUNTRY_POLICY_AUTO.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_MULTIPLE_PHY_DATA_BIN_EMBEDDED

Support embedded multiple phy init data bin to app bin

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION > CONFIG_ESP32_SUPPORT_MULTIPLE_PHY_INIT_DATA_BIN

If enabled, multiple phy init data bin will embedded into app bin If not enabled, multiple phy init data bin will still leave alone, and need to be flashed by users.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_INIT_DATA_ERROR

Terminate operation when PHY init data error

Found in: Component config > PHY > CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_INIT_DATA_IN_PARTITION > CONFIG_ESP32_SUPPORT_MULTIPLE_PHY_INIT_DATA_BIN

If enabled, when an error occurs while the PHY init data is updated, the program will terminate and restart. If not enabled, the PHY init data will not be updated when an error occurs.

Default value:
CONFIG_ESP32_PHY_MAX_WIFI_TX_POWER

Max WiFi TX power (dBm)

Found in: Component config > PHY

Set maximum transmit power for WiFi radio. Actual transmit power for high data rates may be lower than this setting.

Range:

  • from 10 to 20

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_ESP_PHY_ENABLE_USB

Enable USB when phy init

Found in: Component config > PHY

When using USB Serial/JTAG/OTG/CDC, PHY should enable USB, otherwise USB module can not work properly. Notice: Enabling this configuration option will slightly impact wifi performance.

Default value:

  • No (disabled) if USB_OTG_SUPPORTED

Core dump

Contains:

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_TO_FLASH_OR_UART

Data destination

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Select place to store core dump: flash, uart or none (to disable core dumps generation).

Core dumps to Flash are not available if PSRAM is used for task stacks.

If core dump is configured to be stored in flash and custom partition table is used add corresponding entry to your CSV. For examples, please see predefined partition table CSV descriptions in the components/partition_table directory.

Available options:

  • Flash (ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_FLASH)

  • UART (ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_UART)

  • None (ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_NONE)

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT

Core dump data format

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Select the data format for core dump.

Available options:

  • Binary format (ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_BIN)

  • ELF format (ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_ELF)

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_CHECKSUM

Core dump data integrity check

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Select the integrity check for the core dump.

Available options:

  • Use CRC32 for integrity verification (ESP_COREDUMP_CHECKSUM_CRC32)

  • Use SHA256 for integrity verification (ESP_COREDUMP_CHECKSUM_SHA256)

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_CHECK_BOOT

Check core dump data integrity on boot

Found in: Component config > Core dump

When enabled, if any data are found on the flash core dump partition, they will be checked by calculating their checksum.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_FLASH

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_MAX_TASKS_NUM

Maximum number of tasks

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Maximum number of tasks snapshots in core dump.

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_UART_DELAY

Delay before print to UART

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Config delay (in ms) before printing core dump to UART. Delay can be interrupted by pressing Enter key.

Default value:

  • 0 if ESP_COREDUMP_ENABLE_TO_UART

CONFIG_ESP_COREDUMP_DECODE

Handling of UART core dumps in IDF Monitor

Found in: Component config > Core dump

Available options:

  • Decode and show summary (info_corefile) (ESP_COREDUMP_DECODE_INFO)

  • Don’t decode (ESP_COREDUMP_DECODE_DISABLE)

FAT Filesystem support

Contains:

CONFIG_FATFS_CHOOSE_CODEPAGE

OEM Code Page

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

OEM code page used for file name encodings.

If “Dynamic” is selected, code page can be chosen at runtime using f_setcp function. Note that choosing this option will increase application size by ~480kB.

Available options:

  • Dynamic (all code pages supported) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_DYNAMIC)

  • US (CP437) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_437)

  • Arabic (CP720) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_720)

  • Greek (CP737) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_737)

  • KBL (CP771) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_771)

  • Baltic (CP775) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_775)

  • Latin 1 (CP850) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_850)

  • Latin 2 (CP852) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_852)

  • Cyrillic (CP855) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_855)

  • Turkish (CP857) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_857)

  • Portugese (CP860) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_860)

  • Icelandic (CP861) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_861)

  • Hebrew (CP862) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_862)

  • Canadian French (CP863) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_863)

  • Arabic (CP864) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_864)

  • Nordic (CP865) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_865)

  • Russian (CP866) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_866)

  • Greek 2 (CP869) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_869)

  • Japanese (DBCS) (CP932) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_932)

  • Simplified Chinese (DBCS) (CP936) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_936)

  • Korean (DBCS) (CP949) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_949)

  • Traditional Chinese (DBCS) (CP950) (FATFS_CODEPAGE_950)

CONFIG_FATFS_LONG_FILENAMES

Long filename support

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Support long filenames in FAT. Long filename data increases memory usage. FATFS can be configured to store the buffer for long filename data in stack or heap.

Available options:

  • No long filenames (FATFS_LFN_NONE)

  • Long filename buffer in heap (FATFS_LFN_HEAP)

  • Long filename buffer on stack (FATFS_LFN_STACK)

CONFIG_FATFS_MAX_LFN

Max long filename length

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Maximum long filename length. Can be reduced to save RAM.

Range:

  • from 12 to 255

Default value:

  • 255

CONFIG_FATFS_API_ENCODING

API character encoding

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

Choose encoding for character and string arguments/returns when using FATFS APIs. The encoding of arguments will usually depend on text editor settings.

Available options:

  • API uses ANSI/OEM encoding (FATFS_API_ENCODING_ANSI_OEM)

  • API uses UTF-16 encoding (FATFS_API_ENCODING_UTF_16)

  • API uses UTF-8 encoding (FATFS_API_ENCODING_UTF_8)

CONFIG_FATFS_FS_LOCK

Number of simultaneously open files protected by lock function

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

This option sets the FATFS configuration value _FS_LOCK. The option _FS_LOCK switches file lock function to control duplicated file open and illegal operation to open objects.

* 0: Disable file lock function. To avoid volume corruption, application should avoid illegal open, remove and rename to the open objects.

* >0: Enable file lock function. The value defines how many files/sub-directories can be opened simultaneously under file lock control.

Note that the file lock control is independent of re-entrancy.

Range:

  • from 0 to 65535

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FATFS_TIMEOUT_MS

Timeout for acquiring a file lock, ms

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

This option sets FATFS configuration value _FS_TIMEOUT, scaled to milliseconds. Sets the number of milliseconds FATFS will wait to acquire a mutex when operating on an open file. For example, if one task is performing a lenghty operation, another task will wait for the first task to release the lock, and time out after amount of time set by this option.

Default value:

  • 10000

CONFIG_FATFS_PER_FILE_CACHE

Use separate cache for each file

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

This option affects FATFS configuration value _FS_TINY.

If this option is set, _FS_TINY is 0, and each open file has its own cache, size of the cache is equal to the _MAX_SS variable (512 or 4096 bytes). This option uses more RAM if more than 1 file is open, but needs less reads and writes to the storage for some operations.

If this option is not set, _FS_TINY is 1, and single cache is used for all open files, size is also equal to _MAX_SS variable. This reduces the amount of heap used when multiple files are open, but increases the number of read and write operations which FATFS needs to make.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FATFS_ALLOC_PREFER_EXTRAM

Perfer external RAM when allocating FATFS buffers

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

When the option is enabled, internal buffers used by FATFS will be allocated from external RAM. If the allocation from external RAM fails, the buffer will be allocated from the internal RAM. Disable this option if optimizing for performance. Enable this option if optimizing for internal memory size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_USE_CAPS_ALLOC || SPIRAM_USE_MALLOC

CONFIG_FATFS_USE_FASTSEEK

Enable fast seek algorithm when using lseek function through VFS FAT

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support

The fast seek feature enables fast backward/long seek operations without FAT access by using an in-memory CLMT (cluster link map table). Please note, fast-seek is only allowed for read-mode files, if a file is opened in write-mode, the seek mechanism will automatically fallback to the default implementation.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FATFS_FAST_SEEK_BUFFER_SIZE

Fast seek CLMT buffer size

Found in: Component config > FAT Filesystem support > CONFIG_FATFS_USE_FASTSEEK

If fast seek algorithm is enabled, this defines the size of CLMT buffer used by this algorithm in 32-bit word units. This value should be chosen based on prior knowledge of maximum elements of each file entry would store.

Default value:

Modbus configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_FMB_COMM_MODE_TCP_EN

Enable Modbus stack support for TCP communication mode

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Enable Modbus TCP option for stack.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FMB_TCP_PORT_DEFAULT

Modbus TCP port number

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration > CONFIG_FMB_COMM_MODE_TCP_EN

Modbus default port number used by Modbus TCP stack

Range:

  • from 0 to 65535

Default value:

  • 502

CONFIG_FMB_TCP_PORT_MAX_CONN

Maximum allowed connections for TCP stack

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration > CONFIG_FMB_COMM_MODE_TCP_EN

Maximum allowed connections number for Modbus TCP stack. This is used by Modbus master and slave port layer to establish connections. This parameter may decrease performance of Modbus stack and can cause increasing of processing time (increase only if absolutely necessary).

Range:

  • from 1 to 6

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_FMB_TCP_CONNECTION_TOUT_SEC

Modbus TCP connection timeout

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration > CONFIG_FMB_COMM_MODE_TCP_EN

Modbus TCP connection timeout in seconds. Once expired the current connection with the client will be closed and Modbus slave will be waiting for new connection to accept.

Range:

  • from 1 to 3600

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_FMB_COMM_MODE_RTU_EN

Enable Modbus stack support for RTU mode

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Enable RTU Modbus communication mode option for Modbus serial stack.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FMB_COMM_MODE_ASCII_EN

Enable Modbus stack support for ASCII mode

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Enable ASCII Modbus communication mode option for Modbus serial stack.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FMB_MASTER_TIMEOUT_MS_RESPOND

Slave respond timeout (Milliseconds)

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

If master sends a frame which is not broadcast, it has to wait sometime for slave response. if slave is not respond in this time, the master will process timeout error.

Range:

  • from 50 to 3000

Default value:

  • 150

CONFIG_FMB_MASTER_DELAY_MS_CONVERT

Slave conversion delay (Milliseconds)

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

If master sends a broadcast frame, it has to wait conversion time to delay, then master can send next frame.

Range:

  • from 50 to 400

Default value:

  • 200

CONFIG_FMB_QUEUE_LENGTH

Modbus serial task queue length

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus serial driver queue length. It is used by event queue task. See the serial driver API for more information.

Range:

  • from 0 to 200

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_FMB_PORT_TASK_STACK_SIZE

Modbus port task stack size

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus port task stack size for rx/tx event processing. It may be adjusted when debugging is enabled (for example).

Range:

  • from 2048 to 8192

Default value:

  • 4096

CONFIG_FMB_SERIAL_BUF_SIZE

Modbus serial task RX/TX buffer size

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus serial task RX and TX buffer size for UART driver initialization. This buffer is used for modbus frame transfer. The Modbus protocol maximum frame size is 256 bytes. Bigger size can be used for non standard implementations.

Range:

  • from 0 to 2048

Default value:

  • 256

CONFIG_FMB_SERIAL_ASCII_BITS_PER_SYMB

Number of data bits per ASCII character

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

This option defines the number of data bits per ASCII character.

Range:

  • from 7 to 8

Default value:

  • 8

CONFIG_FMB_SERIAL_ASCII_TIMEOUT_RESPOND_MS

Response timeout for ASCII communication mode (ms)

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

This option defines response timeout of slave in milliseconds for ASCII communication mode. Thus the timeout will expire and allow the master program to handle the error.

Range:

  • from 300 to 2000

Default value:

  • 1000

CONFIG_FMB_PORT_TASK_PRIO

Modbus port task priority

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus port data processing task priority. The priority of Modbus controller task is equal to (CONFIG_FMB_PORT_TASK_PRIO - 1).

Range:

  • from 3 to 23

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_FMB_PORT_TASK_AFFINITY

Modbus task affinity

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Allows setting the core affinity of the Modbus controller task, i.e. whether the task is pinned to particular CPU, or allowed to run on any CPU.

Available options:

  • No affinity (FMB_PORT_TASK_AFFINITY_NO_AFFINITY)

  • CPU0 (FMB_PORT_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU0)

  • CPU1 (FMB_PORT_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU1)

CONFIG_FMB_CONTROLLER_SLAVE_ID_SUPPORT

Modbus controller slave ID support

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus slave ID support enable. When enabled the Modbus <Report Slave ID> command is supported by stack.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FMB_CONTROLLER_SLAVE_ID

Modbus controller slave ID

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration > CONFIG_FMB_CONTROLLER_SLAVE_ID_SUPPORT

Modbus slave ID value to identify modbus device in the network using <Report Slave ID> command. Most significant byte of ID is used as short device ID and other three bytes used as long ID.

Range:

  • from 0 to 4294967295

Default value:

  • “0x00112233”

CONFIG_FMB_CONTROLLER_NOTIFY_TIMEOUT

Modbus controller notification timeout (ms)

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus controller notification timeout in milliseconds. This timeout is used to send notification about accessed parameters.

Range:

  • from 0 to 200

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_FMB_CONTROLLER_NOTIFY_QUEUE_SIZE

Modbus controller notification queue size

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus controller notification queue size. The notification queue is used to get information about accessed parameters.

Range:

  • from 0 to 200

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_FMB_CONTROLLER_STACK_SIZE

Modbus controller stack size

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus controller task stack size. The Stack size may be adjusted when debug mode is used which requires more stack size (for example).

Range:

  • from 0 to 8192

Default value:

  • 4096

CONFIG_FMB_EVENT_QUEUE_TIMEOUT

Modbus stack event queue timeout (ms)

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus stack event queue timeout in milliseconds. This may help to optimize Modbus stack event processing time.

Range:

  • from 0 to 500

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_FMB_TIMER_PORT_ENABLED

Modbus stack use timer for 3.5T symbol time measurement

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

If this option is set the Modbus stack uses timer for T3.5 time measurement. Else the internal UART TOUT timeout is used for 3.5T symbol time measurement.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FMB_TIMER_GROUP

Slave Timer group number

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus slave Timer group number that is used for timeout measurement.

Range:

  • from 0 to 1

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FMB_TIMER_INDEX

Slave Timer index in the group

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus slave Timer Index in the group that is used for timeout measurement.

Range:

  • from 0 to 1

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FMB_MASTER_TIMER_GROUP

Master Timer group number

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus master Timer group number that is used for timeout measurement.

Range:

  • from 0 to 1

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FMB_MASTER_TIMER_INDEX

Master Timer index

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

Modbus master Timer Index in the group that is used for timeout measurement. Note: Modbus master and slave should have different timer index to be able to work simultaneously.

Range:

  • from 0 to 1

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FMB_TIMER_ISR_IN_IRAM

Place timer interrupt handler into IRAM

Found in: Component config > Modbus configuration

This option places Modbus timer IRQ handler into IRAM. This allows to avoid delays related to processing of non-IRAM-safe interrupts during a flash write operation (NVS updating a value, or some other flash API which has to perform an read/write operation and disable CPU cache). This option has dependency with the UART_ISR_IN_IRAM option which places UART interrupt handler into IRAM to prevent delays related to processing of UART events.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

FreeRTOS

Contains:

CONFIG_FREERTOS_UNICORE

Run FreeRTOS only on first core

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

This version of FreeRTOS normally takes control of all cores of the CPU. Select this if you only want to start it on the first core. This is needed when e.g. another process needs complete control over the second core.

# This invisible config value sets the value of tskNO_AFFINITY in task.h. # Intended to be used as a constant from other Kconfig files. # Value is (32-bit) INT_MAX.

CONFIG_FREERTOS_CORETIMER

Xtensa timer to use as the FreeRTOS tick source

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

FreeRTOS needs a timer with an associated interrupt to use as the main tick source to increase counters, run timers and do pre-emptive multitasking with. There are multiple timers available to do this, with different interrupt priorities. Check

Available options:

  • Timer 0 (int 6, level 1) (FREERTOS_CORETIMER_0)

    Select this to use timer 0

  • Timer 1 (int 15, level 3) (FREERTOS_CORETIMER_1)

    Select this to use timer 1

CONFIG_FREERTOS_OPTIMIZED_SCHEDULER

Enable FreeRTOS pĺatform optimized scheduler

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

On most platforms there are instructions can speedup the ready task searching. Enabling this option the FreeRTOS with this instructions support will be built.

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_HZ

Tick rate (Hz)

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

Select the tick rate at which FreeRTOS does pre-emptive context switching.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1000

Default value:

  • 100

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ASSERT_ON_UNTESTED_FUNCTION

Halt when an SMP-untested function is called

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

Some functions in FreeRTOS have not been thoroughly tested yet when moving to the SMP implementation of FreeRTOS. When this option is enabled, these fuctions will throw an assert().

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW

Check for stack overflow

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

FreeRTOS can check for stack overflows in threads and trigger an user function called vApplicationStackOverflowHook when this happens.

Available options:

  • No checking (FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW_NONE)

    Do not check for stack overflows (configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW=0)

  • Check by stack pointer value (FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW_PTRVAL)

    Check for stack overflows on each context switch by checking if the stack pointer is in a valid range. Quick but does not detect stack overflows that happened between context switches (configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW=1)

  • Check using canary bytes (FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW_CANARY)

    Places some magic bytes at the end of the stack area and on each context switch, check if these bytes are still intact. More thorough than just checking the pointer, but also slightly slower. (configCHECK_FOR_STACK_OVERFLOW=2)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_WATCHPOINT_END_OF_STACK

Set a debug watchpoint as a stack overflow check

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

FreeRTOS can check if a stack has overflown its bounds by checking either the value of the stack pointer or by checking the integrity of canary bytes. (See FREERTOS_CHECK_STACKOVERFLOW for more information.) These checks only happen on a context switch, and the situation that caused the stack overflow may already be long gone by then. This option will use the last debug memory watchpoint to allow breaking into the debugger (or panic’ing) as soon as any of the last 32 bytes on the stack of a task are overwritten. The side effect is that using gdb, you effectively have one hardware watchpoint less because the last one is overwritten as soon as a task switch happens.

Another consequence is that due to alignment requirements of the watchpoint, the usable stack size decreases by up to 60 bytes. This is because the watchpoint region has to be aligned to its size and the size for the stack watchpoint in IDF is 32 bytes.

This check only triggers if the stack overflow writes within 32 bytes near the end of the stack, rather than overshooting further, so it is worth combining this approach with one of the other stack overflow check methods.

When this watchpoint is hit, gdb will stop with a SIGTRAP message. When no JTAG OCD is attached, esp-idf will panic on an unhandled debug exception.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_INTERRUPT_BACKTRACE

Enable backtrace from interrupt to task context

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

If this option is enabled, interrupt stack frame will be modified to point to the code of the interrupted task as its return address. This helps the debugger (or the panic handler) show a backtrace from the interrupt to the task which was interrupted. This also works for nested interrupts: higer level interrupt stack can be traced back to the lower level interrupt. This option adds 4 instructions to the interrupt dispatching code.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_THREAD_LOCAL_STORAGE_POINTERS

Number of thread local storage pointers

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

FreeRTOS has the ability to store per-thread pointers in the task control block. This controls the number of pointers available.

This value must be at least 1. Index 0 is reserved for use by the pthreads API thread-local-storage. Other indexes can be used for any desired purpose.

Range:

  • from 1 to 256

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ASSERT

FreeRTOS assertions

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

Failed FreeRTOS configASSERT() assertions can be configured to behave in different ways.

By default these behave the same as the global project assert settings.

Available options:

  • abort() on failed assertions (FREERTOS_ASSERT_FAIL_ABORT)

    If a FreeRTOS configASSERT() fails, FreeRTOS will abort() and halt execution. The panic handler can be configured to handle the outcome of an abort() in different ways.

    If assertions are disabled for the entire project, they are also disabled in FreeRTOS and this option is unavailable.

  • Print and continue failed assertions (FREERTOS_ASSERT_FAIL_PRINT_CONTINUE)

    If a FreeRTOS assertion fails, print it out and continue.

  • Disable FreeRTOS assertions (FREERTOS_ASSERT_DISABLE)

    FreeRTOS configASSERT() will not be compiled into the binary.

CONFIG_FREERTOS_IDLE_TASK_STACKSIZE

Idle Task stack size

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

The idle task has its own stack, sized in bytes. The default size is enough for most uses. Size can be reduced to 768 bytes if no (or simple) FreeRTOS idle hooks are used and pthread local storage or FreeRTOS local storage cleanup callbacks are not used.

The stack size may need to be increased above the default if the app installs idle or thread local storage cleanup hooks that use a lot of stack memory.

Range:

  • from 768 to 32768

Default value:

  • 2304

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ISR_STACKSIZE

ISR stack size

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

The interrupt handlers have their own stack. The size of the stack can be defined here. Each processor has its own stack, so the total size occupied will be twice this.

Range:

  • from 2096 to 32768 if ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_ELF

  • from 1536 to 32768

Default value:

  • 2096 if ESP_COREDUMP_DATA_FORMAT_ELF

  • 1536

CONFIG_FREERTOS_LEGACY_HOOKS

Use FreeRTOS legacy hooks

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

FreeRTOS offers a number of hooks/callback functions that are called when a timer tick happens, the idle thread runs etc. esp-idf replaces these by runtime registerable hooks using the esp_register_freertos_xxx_hook system, but for legacy reasons the old hooks can also still be enabled. Please enable this only if you have code that for some reason can’t be migrated to the esp_register_freertos_xxx_hook system.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_MAX_TASK_NAME_LEN

Maximum task name length

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

Changes the maximum task name length. Each task allocated will include this many bytes for a task name. Using a shorter value saves a small amount of RAM, a longer value allows more complex names.

For most uses, the default of 16 is OK.

Range:

  • from 1 to 256

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_FREERTOS_ENABLE_STATIC_TASK_CLEAN_UP

Enable static task clean up hook

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

Enable this option to make FreeRTOS call the static task clean up hook when a task is deleted.

Bear in mind that if this option is enabled you will need to implement the following function:

void vPortCleanUpTCB ( void \*pxTCB ) {
    // place clean up code here
}
Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TIMER_TASK_PRIORITY

FreeRTOS timer task priority

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

The timer service task (primarily) makes use of existing FreeRTOS features, allowing timer functionality to be added to an application with minimal impact on the size of the application’s executable binary.

Use this constant to define the priority that the timer task will run at.

Range:

  • from 1 to 25

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TIMER_TASK_STACK_DEPTH

FreeRTOS timer task stack size

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

The timer service task (primarily) makes use of existing FreeRTOS features, allowing timer functionality to be added to an application with minimal impact on the size of the application’s executable binary.

Use this constant to define the size (in bytes) of the stack allocated for the timer task.

Range:

  • from 1536 to 32768

Default value:

  • 2048

CONFIG_FREERTOS_TIMER_QUEUE_LENGTH

FreeRTOS timer queue length

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

FreeRTOS provides a set of timer related API functions. Many of these functions use a standard FreeRTOS queue to send commands to the timer service task. The queue used for this purpose is called the ‘timer command queue’. The ‘timer command queue’ is private to the FreeRTOS timer implementation, and cannot be accessed directly.

For most uses the default value of 10 is OK.

Range:

  • from 5 to 20

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_FREERTOS_QUEUE_REGISTRY_SIZE

FreeRTOS queue registry size

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

FreeRTOS uses the queue registry as a means for kernel aware debuggers to locate queues, semaphores, and mutexes. The registry allows for a textual name to be associated with a queue for easy identification within a debugging GUI. A value of 0 will disable queue registry functionality, and a value larger than 0 will specify the number of queues/semaphores/mutexes that the registry can hold.

Range:

  • from 0 to 20

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TRACE_FACILITY

Enable FreeRTOS trace facility

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

If enabled, configUSE_TRACE_FACILITY will be defined as 1 in FreeRTOS. This will allow the usage of trace facility functions such as uxTaskGetSystemState().

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS

Enable FreeRTOS stats formatting functions

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TRACE_FACILITY

If enabled, configUSE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS will be defined as 1 in FreeRTOS. This will allow the usage of stats formatting functions such as vTaskList().

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_VTASKLIST_INCLUDE_COREID

Enable display of xCoreID in vTaskList

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TRACE_FACILITY > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS

If enabled, this will include an extra column when vTaskList is called to display the CoreID the task is pinned to (0,1) or -1 if not pinned.

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_GENERATE_RUN_TIME_STATS

Enable FreeRTOS to collect run time stats

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

If enabled, configGENERATE_RUN_TIME_STATS will be defined as 1 in FreeRTOS. This will allow FreeRTOS to collect information regarding the usage of processor time amongst FreeRTOS tasks. Run time stats are generated using either the ESP Timer or the CPU Clock as the clock source (Note that run time stats are only valid until the clock source overflows). The function vTaskGetRunTimeStats() will also be available if FREERTOS_USE_STATS_FORMATTING_FUNCTIONS and FREERTOS_USE_TRACE_FACILITY are enabled. vTaskGetRunTimeStats() will display the run time of each task as a % of the total run time of all CPUs (task run time / no of CPUs) / (total run time / 100 )

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_RUN_TIME_STATS_CLK

Choose the clock source for run time stats

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > CONFIG_FREERTOS_GENERATE_RUN_TIME_STATS

Choose the clock source for FreeRTOS run time stats. Options are CPU0’s CPU Clock or the ESP Timer. Both clock sources are 32 bits. The CPU Clock can run at a higher frequency hence provide a finer resolution but will overflow much quicker. Note that run time stats are only valid until the clock source overflows.

Available options:

  • Use ESP TIMER for run time stats (FREERTOS_RUN_TIME_STATS_USING_ESP_TIMER)

    ESP Timer will be used as the clock source for FreeRTOS run time stats. The ESP Timer runs at a frequency of 1MHz regardless of Dynamic Frequency Scaling. Therefore the ESP Timer will overflow in approximately 4290 seconds.

  • Use CPU Clock for run time stats (FREERTOS_RUN_TIME_STATS_USING_CPU_CLK)

    CPU Clock will be used as the clock source for the generation of run time stats. The CPU Clock has a frequency dependent on ESP32_DEFAULT_CPU_FREQ_MHZ and Dynamic Frequency Scaling (DFS). Therefore the CPU Clock frequency can fluctuate between 80 to 240MHz. Run time stats generated using the CPU Clock represents the number of CPU cycles each task is allocated and DOES NOT reflect the amount of time each task runs for (as CPU clock frequency can change). If the CPU clock consistently runs at the maximum frequency of 240MHz, it will overflow in approximately 17 seconds.

CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TICKLESS_IDLE

Tickless idle support

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

If power management support is enabled, FreeRTOS will be able to put the system into light sleep mode when no tasks need to run for a number of ticks. This number can be set using FREERTOS_IDLE_TIME_BEFORE_SLEEP option. This feature is also known as “automatic light sleep”.

Note that timers created using esp_timer APIs may prevent the system from entering sleep mode, even when no tasks need to run.

If disabled, automatic light sleep support will be disabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_IDLE_TIME_BEFORE_SLEEP

Minimum number of ticks to enter sleep mode for

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS > CONFIG_FREERTOS_USE_TICKLESS_IDLE

FreeRTOS will enter light sleep mode if no tasks need to run for this number of ticks.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_FREERTOS_TASK_FUNCTION_WRAPPER

Enclose all task functions in a wrapper function

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

If enabled, all FreeRTOS task functions will be enclosed in a wrapper function. If a task function mistakenly returns (i.e. does not delete), the call flow will return to the wrapper function. The wrapper function will then log an error and abort the application. This option is also required for GDB backtraces and C++ exceptions to work correctly inside top-level task functions.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_CHECK_MUTEX_GIVEN_BY_OWNER

Check that mutex semaphore is given by owner task

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

If enabled, assert that when a mutex semaphore is given, the task giving the semaphore is the task which is currently holding the mutex.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_CHECK_PORT_CRITICAL_COMPLIANCE

Tests compliance with Vanilla FreeRTOS port*_CRITICAL calls

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

If enabled, context of port*_CRITICAL calls (ISR or Non-ISR) would be checked to be in compliance with Vanilla FreeRTOS. e.g Calling port*_CRITICAL from ISR context would cause assert failure

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_PLACE_FUNCTIONS_INTO_FLASH

Place FreeRTOS functions into Flash

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

When enabled the selected Non-ISR FreeRTOS functions will be placed into Flash memory instead of IRAM. This saves up to 8KB of IRAM depending on which functions are used.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_FREERTOS_FPU_IN_ISR

Allow use of float inside Level 1 ISR (EXPERIMENTAL)

Found in: Component config > FreeRTOS

When enabled, the usage of float type is allowed inside Level 1 ISRs.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Heap memory debugging

Contains:

CONFIG_HEAP_CORRUPTION_DETECTION

Heap corruption detection

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Enable heap poisoning features to detect heap corruption caused by out-of-bounds access to heap memory.

See the “Heap Memory Debugging” page of the IDF documentation for a description of each level of heap corruption detection.

Available options:

  • Basic (no poisoning) (HEAP_POISONING_DISABLED)

  • Light impact (HEAP_POISONING_LIGHT)

  • Comprehensive (HEAP_POISONING_COMPREHENSIVE)

CONFIG_HEAP_TRACING_DEST

Heap tracing

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Enables the heap tracing API defined in esp_heap_trace.h.

This function causes a moderate increase in IRAM code side and a minor increase in heap function (malloc/free/realloc) CPU overhead, even when the tracing feature is not used. So it’s best to keep it disabled unless tracing is being used.

Available options:

  • Disabled (HEAP_TRACING_OFF)

  • Standalone (HEAP_TRACING_STANDALONE)

  • Host-based (HEAP_TRACING_TOHOST)

CONFIG_HEAP_TRACING_STACK_DEPTH

Heap tracing stack depth

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Number of stack frames to save when tracing heap operation callers.

More stack frames uses more memory in the heap trace buffer (and slows down allocation), but can provide useful information.

CONFIG_HEAP_TASK_TRACKING

Enable heap task tracking

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

Enables tracking the task responsible for each heap allocation.

This function depends on heap poisoning being enabled and adds four more bytes of overhead for each block allocated.

CONFIG_HEAP_ABORT_WHEN_ALLOCATION_FAILS

Abort if memory allocation fails

Found in: Component config > Heap memory debugging

When enabled, if a memory allocation operation fails it will cause a system abort.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

jsmn

Contains:

CONFIG_JSMN_STRICT

Enable strict mode

Found in: Component config > jsmn

In strict mode primitives are: numbers and booleans

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

libsodium

Contains:

CONFIG_LIBSODIUM_USE_MBEDTLS_SHA

Use mbedTLS SHA256 & SHA512 implementations

Found in: Component config > libsodium

If this option is enabled, libsodium will use thin wrappers around mbedTLS for SHA256 & SHA512 operations.

This saves some code size if mbedTLS is also used. However it is incompatible with hardware SHA acceleration (due to the way libsodium’s API manages SHA state).

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Log output

Contains:

CONFIG_LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL

Default log verbosity

Found in: Component config > Log output

Specify how much output to see in logs by default. You can set lower verbosity level at runtime using esp_log_level_set function.

Note that this setting limits which log statements are compiled into the program. So setting this to, say, “Warning” would mean that changing log level to “Debug” at runtime will not be possible.

Available options:

  • No output (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_NONE)

  • Error (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_ERROR)

  • Warning (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (LOG_DEFAULT_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

CONFIG_LOG_COLORS

Use ANSI terminal colors in log output

Found in: Component config > Log output

Enable ANSI terminal color codes in bootloader output.

In order to view these, your terminal program must support ANSI color codes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LOG_TIMESTAMP_SOURCE

Log Timestamps

Found in: Component config > Log output

Choose what sort of timestamp is displayed in the log output:

  • Milliseconds since boot is calulated from the RTOS tick count multiplied by the tick period. This time will reset after a software reboot. e.g. (90000)

  • System time is taken from POSIX time functions which use the ESP32’s RTC and FRC1 timers to maintain an accurate time. The system time is initialized to 0 on startup, it can be set with an SNTP sync, or with POSIX time functions. This time will not reset after a software reboot. e.g. (00:01:30.000)

  • NOTE: Currently this will not get used in logging from binary blobs (i.e WiFi & Bluetooth libraries), these will always print milliseconds since boot.

Available options:

  • Milliseconds Since Boot (LOG_TIMESTAMP_SOURCE_RTOS)

  • System Time (LOG_TIMESTAMP_SOURCE_SYSTEM)

LWIP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_LOCAL_HOSTNAME

Local netif hostname

Found in: Component config > LWIP

The default name this device will report to other devices on the network. Could be updated at runtime with esp_netif_set_hostname()

Default value:

  • “espressif”

CONFIG_LWIP_DNS_SUPPORT_MDNS_QUERIES

Enable mDNS queries in resolving host name

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, standard API such as gethostbyname support .local addresses by sending one shot multicast mDNS query

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_L2_TO_L3_COPY

Enable copy between Layer2 and Layer3 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, all traffic from layer2(WIFI Driver) will be copied to a new buffer before sending it to layer3(LWIP stack), freeing the layer2 buffer. Please be notified that the total layer2 receiving buffer is fixed and ESP32 currently supports 25 layer2 receiving buffer, when layer2 buffer runs out of memory, then the incoming packets will be dropped in hardware. The layer3 buffer is allocated from the heap, so the total layer3 receiving buffer depends on the available heap size, when heap runs out of memory, no copy will be sent to layer3 and packet will be dropped in layer2. Please make sure you fully understand the impact of this feature before enabling it.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IRAM_OPTIMIZATION

Enable LWIP IRAM optimization

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, some functions relating to RX/TX in LWIP will be put into IRAM, it can improve UDP/TCP throughput by >10% for single core mode, it doesn’t help too much for dual core mode. On the other hand, it needs about 10KB IRAM for these optimizations.

If this feature is disabled, all lwip functions will be put into FLASH.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TIMERS_ONDEMAND

Enable LWIP Timers on demand

Found in: Component config > LWIP

If this feature is enabled, IGMP and MLD6 timers will be activated only when joining groups or receiving QUERY packets.

This feature will reduce the power consumption for applications which do not use IGMP and MLD6.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_SOCKETS

Max number of open sockets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Sockets take up a certain amount of memory, and allowing fewer sockets to be open at the same time conserves memory. Specify the maximum amount of sockets here. The valid value is from 1 to 16.

Range:

  • from 1 to 16

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_LWIP_USE_ONLY_LWIP_SELECT

Support LWIP socket select() only (DEPRECATED)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

This option is deprecated. Use VFS_SUPPORT_SELECT instead, which is the inverse of this option.

The virtual filesystem layer of select() redirects sockets to lwip_select() and non-socket file descriptors to their respective driver implementations. If this option is enabled then all calls of select() will be redirected to lwip_select(), therefore, select can be used for sockets only.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_LINGER

Enable SO_LINGER processing

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows SO_LINGER processing. l_onoff = 1,l_linger can set the timeout.

If l_linger=0, When a connection is closed, TCP will terminate the connection. This means that TCP will discard any data packets stored in the socket send buffer and send an RST to the peer.

If l_linger!=0,Then closesocket() calls to block the process until the remaining data packets has been sent or timed out.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_REUSE

Enable SO_REUSEADDR option

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows binding to a port which remains in TIME_WAIT.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_REUSE_RXTOALL

SO_REUSEADDR copies broadcast/multicast to all matches

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_SO_REUSE

Enabling this option means that any incoming broadcast or multicast packet will be copied to all of the local sockets that it matches (may be more than one if SO_REUSEADDR is set on the socket.)

This increases memory overhead as the packets need to be copied, however they are only copied per matching socket. You can safely disable it if you don’t plan to receive broadcast or multicast traffic on more than one socket at a time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_SO_RCVBUF

Enable SO_RCVBUF option

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows checking for available data on a netconn.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_NETBUF_RECVINFO

Enable IP_PKTINFO option

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows checking for the destination address of a received IPv4 Packet.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP4_FRAG

Enable fragment outgoing IP4 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows fragmenting outgoing IP4 packets if their size exceeds MTU.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP6_FRAG

Enable fragment outgoing IP6 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows fragmenting outgoing IP6 packets if their size exceeds MTU.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP4_REASSEMBLY

Enable reassembly incoming fragmented IP4 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows reassemblying incoming fragmented IP4 packets.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP6_REASSEMBLY

Enable reassembly incoming fragmented IP6 packets

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows reassemblying incoming fragmented IP6 packets.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IP_FORWARD

Enable IP forwarding

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows packets forwarding across multiple interfaces.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV4_NAPT

Enable NAT (new/experimental)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_IP_FORWARD

Enabling this option allows Network Address and Port Translation.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_STATS

Enable LWIP statistics

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows LWIP statistics

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_ETHARP_TRUST_IP_MAC

Enable LWIP ARP trust

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows ARP table to be updated.

If this option is enabled, the incoming IP packets cause the ARP table to be updated with the source MAC and IP addresses supplied in the packet. You may want to disable this if you do not trust LAN peers to have the correct addresses, or as a limited approach to attempt to handle spoofing. If disabled, lwIP will need to make a new ARP request if the peer is not already in the ARP table, adding a little latency. The peer *is* in the ARP table if it requested our address before. Also notice that this slows down input processing of every IP packet!

There are two known issues in real application if this feature is enabled: - The LAN peer may have bug to update the ARP table after the ARP entry is aged out. If the ARP entry on the LAN peer is aged out but failed to be updated, all IP packets sent from LWIP to the LAN peer will be dropped by LAN peer. - The LAN peer may not be trustful, the LAN peer may send IP packets to LWIP with two different MACs, but the same IP address. If this happens, the LWIP has problem to receive IP packets from LAN peer.

So the recommendation is to disable this option. Here the LAN peer means the other side to which the ESP station or soft-AP is connected.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_GRATUITOUS_ARP

Send gratuitous ARP periodically

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable this option allows to send gratuitous ARP periodically.

This option solve the compatibility issues.If the ARP table of the AP is old, and the AP doesn’t send ARP request to update it’s ARP table, this will lead to the STA sending IP packet fail. Thus we send gratuitous ARP periodically to let AP update it’s ARP table.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_GARP_TMR_INTERVAL

GARP timer interval(seconds)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_GRATUITOUS_ARP

Set the timer interval for gratuitous ARP. The default value is 60s

Default value:

  • 60

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_RECVMBOX_SIZE

TCPIP task receive mail box size

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Set TCPIP task receive mail box size. Generally bigger value means higher throughput but more memory. The value should be bigger than UDP/TCP mail box size.

Range:
Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_DOES_ARP_CHECK

DHCP: Perform ARP check on any offered address

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option performs a check (via ARP request) if the offered IP address is not already in use by another host on the network.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_DISABLE_CLIENT_ID

DHCP: Disable Use of HW address as client identification

Found in: Component config > LWIP

This option could be used to disable DHCP client identification with its MAC address. (Client id is used by DHCP servers to uniquely identify clients and are included in the DHCP packets as an option 61) Set this option to “y” in order to exclude option 61 from DHCP packets.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_RESTORE_LAST_IP

DHCP: Restore last IP obtained from DHCP server

Found in: Component config > LWIP

When this option is enabled, DHCP client tries to re-obtain last valid IP address obtained from DHCP server. Last valid DHCP configuration is stored in nvs and restored after reset/power-up. If IP is still available, there is no need for sending discovery message to DHCP server and save some time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_COARSE_TIMER_SECS

DHCP coarse timer interval(s)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Set DHCP coarse interval in seconds. A higher value will be less precise but cost less power consumption.

Range:

  • from 1 to 10

Default value:

  • 1

DHCP server

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS

DHCPS: Enable IPv4 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server (DHCPS)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DHCP server

Enabling this option allows the device to run the DHCP server (to dynamically assign IPv4 addresses to clients).

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS_LEASE_UNIT

Multiplier for lease time, in seconds

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DHCP server > CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS

The DHCP server is calculating lease time multiplying the sent and received times by this number of seconds per unit. The default is 60, that equals one minute.

Range:

  • from 1 to 3600

Default value:

  • 60

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS_MAX_STATION_NUM

Maximum number of stations

Found in: Component config > LWIP > DHCP server > CONFIG_LWIP_DHCPS

The maximum number of DHCP clients that are connected to the server. After this number is exceeded, DHCP server removes of the oldest device from it’s address pool, without notification.

Range:

  • from 1 to 64

Default value:

  • 8

CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

Enable IPV4 Link-Local Addressing (AUTOIP)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option allows the device to self-assign an address in the 169.256/16 range if none is assigned statically or via DHCP.

See RFC 3927.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP_TRIES

DHCP Probes before self-assigning IPv4 LL address

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

DHCP client will send this many probes before self-assigning a link local address.

From LWIP help: “This can be set as low as 1 to get an AutoIP address very quickly, but you should be prepared to handle a changing IP address when DHCP overrides AutoIP.” (In the case of ESP-IDF, this means multiple SYSTEM_EVENT_STA_GOT_IP events.)

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP_MAX_CONFLICTS

Max IP conflicts before rate limiting

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

If the AUTOIP functionality detects this many IP conflicts while self-assigning an address, it will go into a rate limited mode.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP_RATE_LIMIT_INTERVAL

Rate limited interval (seconds)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_AUTOIP

If rate limiting self-assignment requests, wait this long between each request.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6

Enable IPv6

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable IPv6 function. If not use IPv6 function, set this option to n. If disabling LWIP_IPV6 then some other components (coap and asio) will no longer be available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_AUTOCONFIG

Enable IPV6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6

Enabling this option allows the devices to IPV6 stateless address autoconfiguration (SLAAC).

See RFC 4862.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_LOOPBACK

Support per-interface loopback

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enabling this option means that if a packet is sent with a destination address equal to the interface’s own IP address, it will “loop back” and be received by this interface.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_LOOPBACK_MAX_PBUFS

Max queued loopback packets per interface

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_LOOPBACK

Configure the maximum number of packets which can be queued for loopback on a given interface. Reducing this number may cause packets to be dropped, but will avoid filling memory with queued packet data.

Range:

  • from 0 to 16

Default value:

  • 8

TCP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_ACTIVE_TCP

Maximum active TCP Connections

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

The maximum number of simultaneously active TCP connections. The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Changing this value by itself does not substantially change the memory usage of LWIP, except for preventing new TCP connections after the limit is reached.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_LISTENING_TCP

Maximum listening TCP Connections

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP connections. The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Changing this value by itself does not substantially change the memory usage of LWIP, except for preventing new listening TCP connections after the limit is reached.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_HIGH_SPEED_RETRANSMISSION

TCP high speed retransmissions

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Speed up the TCP retransmission interval. If disabled, it is recommended to change the number of SYN retransmissions to 6, and TCP initial rto time to 3000.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_MAXRTX

Maximum number of retransmissions of data segments

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum number of retransmissions of data segments.

Range:

  • from 3 to 12

Default value:

  • 12

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_SYNMAXRTX

Maximum number of retransmissions of SYN segments

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum number of retransmissions of SYN segments.

Range:

  • from 3 to 12

Default value:

  • 6

  • 12

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_MSS

Maximum Segment Size (MSS)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum segment size for TCP transmission.

Can be set lower to save RAM, the default value 1460(ipv4)/1440(ipv6) will give best throughput. IPv4 TCP_MSS Range: 576 <= TCP_MSS <= 1460 IPv6 TCP_MSS Range: 1220<= TCP_mSS <= 1440

Range:

  • from 536 to 1460

Default value:

  • 1440

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_TMR_INTERVAL

TCP timer interval(ms)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set TCP timer interval in milliseconds.

Can be used to speed connections on bad networks. A lower value will redeliver unacked packets faster.

Default value:

  • 250

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_MSL

Maximum segment lifetime (MSL)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum segment lifetime in milliseconds.

Default value:

  • 60000

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_FIN_WAIT_TIMEOUT

Maximum FIN segment lifetime

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set maximum segment lifetime in milliseconds.

Default value:

  • 20000

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_SND_BUF_DEFAULT

Default send buffer size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set default send buffer size for new TCP sockets.

Per-socket send buffer size can be changed at runtime with lwip_setsockopt(s, TCP_SNDBUF, …).

This value must be at least 2x the MSS size, and the default is 4x the default MSS size.

Setting a smaller default SNDBUF size can save some RAM, but will decrease performance.

Range:
Default value:

  • 5744

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_WND_DEFAULT

Default receive window size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set default TCP receive window size for new TCP sockets.

Per-socket receive window size can be changed at runtime with lwip_setsockopt(s, TCP_WINDOW, …).

Setting a smaller default receive window size can save some RAM, but will significantly decrease performance.

Range:
Default value:

  • 5744

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_RECVMBOX_SIZE

Default TCP receive mail box size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set TCP receive mail box size. Generally bigger value means higher throughput but more memory. The recommended value is: LWIP_TCP_WND_DEFAULT/TCP_MSS + 2, e.g. if LWIP_TCP_WND_DEFAULT=14360, TCP_MSS=1436, then the recommended receive mail box size is (14360/1436 + 2) = 12.

TCP receive mail box is a per socket mail box, when the application receives packets from TCP socket, LWIP core firstly posts the packets to TCP receive mail box and the application then fetches the packets from mail box. It means LWIP can caches maximum LWIP_TCP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE packets for each TCP socket, so the maximum possible cached TCP packets for all TCP sockets is LWIP_TCP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE multiples the maximum TCP socket number. In other words, the bigger LWIP_TCP_RECVMBOX_SIZE means more memory. On the other hand, if the receiv mail box is too small, the mail box may be full. If the mail box is full, the LWIP drops the packets. So generally we need to make sure the TCP receive mail box is big enough to avoid packet drop between LWIP core and application.

Range:
Default value:

  • 6

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_QUEUE_OOSEQ

Queue incoming out-of-order segments

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Queue incoming out-of-order segments for later use.

Disable this option to save some RAM during TCP sessions, at the expense of increased retransmissions if segments arrive out of order.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_SACK_OUT

Support sending selective acknowledgements

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

TCP will support sending selective acknowledgements (SACKs).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_KEEP_CONNECTION_WHEN_IP_CHANGES

Keep TCP connections when IP changed

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

This option is enabled when the following scenario happen: network dropped and reconnected, IP changes is like: 192.168.0.2->0.0.0.0->192.168.0.2

Disable this option to keep consistent with the original LWIP code behavior.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE

Pre-allocate transmit PBUF size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Allows enabling “oversize” allocation of TCP transmission pbufs ahead of time, which can reduce the length of pbuf chains used for transmission.

This will not make a difference to sockets where Nagle’s algorithm is disabled.

Default value of MSS is fine for most applications, 25% MSS may save some RAM when only transmitting small amounts of data. Disabled will have worst performance and fragmentation characteristics, but uses least RAM overall.

Available options:

  • MSS (LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE_MSS)

  • 25% MSS (LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE_QUARTER_MSS)

  • Disabled (LWIP_TCP_OVERSIZE_DISABLE)

CONFIG_LWIP_WND_SCALE

Support TCP window scale

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Enable this feature to support TCP window scaling.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_RCV_SCALE

Set TCP receiving window scaling factor

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP > CONFIG_LWIP_WND_SCALE

Enable this feature to support TCP window scaling.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_RTO_TIME

Default TCP rto time

Found in: Component config > LWIP > TCP

Set default TCP rto time for a reasonable initial rto. In bad network environment, recommend set value of rto time to 1500.

Default value:

  • 3000

  • 1500

UDP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_UDP_PCBS

Maximum active UDP control blocks

Found in: Component config > LWIP > UDP

The maximum number of active UDP “connections” (ie UDP sockets sending/receiving data). The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_LWIP_UDP_RECVMBOX_SIZE

Default UDP receive mail box size

Found in: Component config > LWIP > UDP

Set UDP receive mail box size. The recommended value is 6.

UDP receive mail box is a per socket mail box, when the application receives packets from UDP socket, LWIP core firstly posts the packets to UDP receive mail box and the application then fetches the packets from mail box. It means LWIP can caches maximum UDP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE packets for each UDP socket, so the maximum possible cached UDP packets for all UDP sockets is UDP_RECCVMBOX_SIZE multiples the maximum UDP socket number. In other words, the bigger UDP_RECVMBOX_SIZE means more memory. On the other hand, if the receiv mail box is too small, the mail box may be full. If the mail box is full, the LWIP drops the packets. So generally we need to make sure the UDP receive mail box is big enough to avoid packet drop between LWIP core and application.

Range:

  • from 6 to 64

Default value:

  • 6

Checksums

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_CHECKSUM_CHECK_IP

Enable LWIP IP checksums

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Checksums

Enable checksum checking for received IP messages

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_CHECKSUM_CHECK_UDP

Enable LWIP UDP checksums

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Checksums

Enable checksum checking for received UDP messages

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_CHECKSUM_CHECK_ICMP

Enable LWIP ICMP checksums

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Checksums

Enable checksum checking for received ICMP messages

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_STACK_SIZE

TCP/IP Task Stack Size

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Configure TCP/IP task stack size, used by LWIP to process multi-threaded TCP/IP operations. Setting this stack too small will result in stack overflow crashes.

Range:

  • from 2048 to 65536

Default value:

  • 3072

CONFIG_LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY

TCP/IP task affinity

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Allows setting LwIP tasks affinity, i.e. whether the task is pinned to CPU0, pinned to CPU1, or allowed to run on any CPU. Currently this applies to “TCP/IP” task and “Ping” task.

Available options:

  • No affinity (LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY_NO_AFFINITY)

  • CPU0 (LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU0)

  • CPU1 (LWIP_TCPIP_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU1)

CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_SUPPORT

Enable PPP support (new/experimental)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable PPP stack. Now only PPP over serial is possible.

PPP over serial support is experimental and unsupported.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_ENABLE_IPV6

Enable IPV6 support for PPP connections (IPV6CP)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_SUPPORT

Enable IPV6 support in PPP for the local link between the DTE (processor) and DCE (modem). There are some modems which do not support the IPV6 addressing in the local link. If they are requested for IPV6CP negotiation, they may time out. This would in turn fail the configuration for the whole link. If your modem is not responding correctly to PPP Phase Network, try to disable IPV6 support.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_MEMP_NUM_ND6_QUEUE

Max number of IPv6 packets to queue during MAC resolution

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Config max number of IPv6 packets to queue during MAC resolution.

Range:

  • from 3 to 20

Default value:

  • 3

CONFIG_LWIP_IPV6_ND6_NUM_NEIGHBORS

Max number of entries in IPv6 neighbor cache

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Config max number of entries in IPv6 neighbor cache

Range:

  • from 3 to 10

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_NOTIFY_PHASE_SUPPORT

Enable Notify Phase Callback

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable to set a callback which is called on change of the internal PPP state machine.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_PAP_SUPPORT

Enable PAP support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_CHAP_SUPPORT

Enable CHAP support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_MSCHAP_SUPPORT

Enable MSCHAP support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Microsoft version of the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MSCHAP) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_MPPE_SUPPORT

Enable MPPE support

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable Microsoft Point-to-Point Encryption (MPPE) support

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PPP_DEBUG_ON

Enable PPP debug log output

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable PPP debug log output

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_SLIP_SUPPORT

Enable SLIP support (new/experimental)

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable SLIP stack. Now only SLIP over serial is possible.

SLIP over serial support is experimental and unsupported.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_SLIP_DEBUG_ON

Enable SLIP debug log output

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_SLIP_SUPPORT

Enable SLIP debug log output

Default value:
ICMP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_ICMP

ICMP: Enable ICMP

Found in: Component config > LWIP > ICMP

Enable ICMP module for check network stability

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_MULTICAST_PING

Respond to multicast pings

Found in: Component config > LWIP > ICMP

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_LWIP_BROADCAST_PING

Respond to broadcast pings

Found in: Component config > LWIP > ICMP

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

LWIP RAW API

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_MAX_RAW_PCBS

Maximum LWIP RAW PCBs

Found in: Component config > LWIP > LWIP RAW API

The maximum number of simultaneously active LWIP RAW protocol control blocks. The practical maximum limit is determined by available heap memory at runtime.

Range:

  • from 1 to 1024

Default value:

  • 16

SNTP

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_MAX_NTP_SERVERS

Maximum number of NTP servers

Found in: Component config > LWIP > SNTP

Set maximum number of NTP servers used by LwIP SNTP module. First argument of sntp_setserver/sntp_setservername functions is limited to this value.

Range:

  • from 1 to 16

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_LWIP_SNTP_UPDATE_DELAY

Request interval to update time (ms)

Found in: Component config > LWIP > SNTP

This option allows you to set the time update period via SNTP. Default is 1 hour. Must not be below 15 seconds by specification. (SNTPv4 RFC 4330 enforces a minimum update time of 15 seconds).

Range:

  • from 15000 to 4294967295

Default value:

  • 3600000

CONFIG_LWIP_ESP_LWIP_ASSERT

Enable LWIP ASSERT checks

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Enable this option keeps LWIP assertion checks enabled. It is recommended to keep this option enabled.

If asserts are disabled for the entire project, they are also disabled for LWIP and this option is ignored.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if COMPILER_OPTIMIZATION_ASSERTIONS_DISABLE

Hooks

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN

TCP ISN Hook

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables to define a TCP ISN hook to randomize initial sequence number in TCP connection. The default TCP ISN algorithm used in IDF (standardized in RFC 6528) produces ISN by combining an MD5 of the new TCP id and a stable secret with the current time. This is because the lwIP implementation (tcp_next_iss) is not very strong, as it does not take into consideration any platform specific entropy source.

Set to LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_CUSTOM to provide custom implementation. Set to LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_NONE to use lwIP implementation.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_NONE)

  • Default implementation (LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_TCP_ISN_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE

IPv6 route Hook

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables custom IPv6 route hook. Setting this to “default” provides weak implementation stub that could be overwritten in application code. Setting this to “custom” provides hook’s declaration only and expects the application to implement it.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE_NONE)

  • Default (weak) implementation (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_IP6_ROUTE_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXTERNAL_RESOLVE

Netconn external resolve Hook

Found in: Component config > LWIP > Hooks

Enables custom DNS resolve hook. Setting this to “default” provides weak implementation stub that could be overwritten in application code. Setting this to “custom” provides hook’s declaration only and expects the application to implement it.

Available options:

  • No hook declared (LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXT_RESOLVE_NONE)

  • Default (weak) implementation (LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXT_RESOLVE_DEFAULT)

  • Custom implementation (LWIP_HOOK_NETCONN_EXT_RESOLVE_CUSTOM)

CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Enable LWIP Debug

Found in: Component config > LWIP

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG_ESP_LOG

Route LWIP debugs through ESP_LOG interface

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Enabling this option routes all enabled LWIP debugs through ESP_LOGD.

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_NETIF_DEBUG

Enable netif debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_PBUF_DEBUG

Enable pbuf debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ETHARP_DEBUG

Enable etharp debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_API_LIB_DEBUG

Enable api lib debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_SOCKETS_DEBUG

Enable socket debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IP_DEBUG

Enable IP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ICMP_DEBUG

Enable ICMP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_STATE_DEBUG

Enable DHCP state tracking

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_DHCP_DEBUG

Enable DHCP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_IP6_DEBUG

Enable IP6 debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_ICMP6_DEBUG

Enable ICMP6 debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:
CONFIG_LWIP_TCP_DEBUG

Enable TCP debug messages

Found in: Component config > LWIP > CONFIG_LWIP_DEBUG

Default value:

mbedTLS

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_MEM_ALLOC_MODE

Memory allocation strategy

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Allocation strategy for mbedTLS, essentially provides ability to allocate all required dynamic allocations from,

  • Internal DRAM memory only

  • External SPIRAM memory only

  • Either internal or external memory based on default malloc() behavior in ESP-IDF

  • Custom allocation mode, by overwriting calloc()/free() using mbedtls_platform_set_calloc_free() function

  • Internal IRAM memory wherever applicable else internal DRAM

Recommended mode here is always internal (*), since that is most preferred from security perspective. But if application requirement does not allow sufficient free internal memory then alternate mode can be selected.

(*) In case of ESP32-S2/ESP32-S3, hardware allows encryption of external SPIRAM contents provided hardware flash encryption feature is enabled. In that case, using external SPIRAM allocation strategy is also safe choice from security perspective.

Available options:

  • Internal memory (MBEDTLS_INTERNAL_MEM_ALLOC)

  • External SPIRAM (MBEDTLS_EXTERNAL_MEM_ALLOC)

  • Default alloc mode (MBEDTLS_DEFAULT_MEM_ALLOC)

  • Custom alloc mode (MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_MEM_ALLOC)

  • Internal IRAM (MBEDTLS_IRAM_8BIT_MEM_ALLOC)

    Allows to use IRAM memory region as 8bit accessible region.

    TLS input and output buffers will be allocated in IRAM section which is 32bit aligned memory. Every unaligned (8bit or 16bit) access will result in an exception and incur penalty of certain clock cycles per unaligned read/write.

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_CONTENT_LEN

TLS maximum message content length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Maximum TLS message length (in bytes) supported by mbedTLS.

16384 is the default and this value is required to comply fully with TLS standards.

However you can set a lower value in order to save RAM. This is safe if the other end of the connection supports Maximum Fragment Length Negotiation Extension (max_fragment_length, see RFC6066) or you know for certain that it will never send a message longer than a certain number of bytes.

If the value is set too low, symptoms are a failed TLS handshake or a return value of MBEDTLS_ERR_SSL_INVALID_RECORD (-0x7200).

Range:

  • from 512 to 16384

Default value:

  • 16384

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ASYMMETRIC_CONTENT_LEN

Asymmetric in/out fragment length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

If enabled, this option allows customizing TLS in/out fragment length in asymmetric way. Please note that enabling this with default values saves 12KB of dynamic memory per TLS connection.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN

TLS maximum incoming fragment length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ASYMMETRIC_CONTENT_LEN

This defines maximum incoming fragment length, overriding default maximum content length (MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_CONTENT_LEN).

Range:

  • from 512 to 16384

Default value:

  • 16384

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN

TLS maximum outgoing fragment length

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ASYMMETRIC_CONTENT_LEN

This defines maximum outgoing fragment length, overriding default maximum content length (MBEDTLS_SSL_MAX_CONTENT_LEN).

Range:

  • from 512 to 16384

Default value:

  • 4096

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER

Using dynamic TX/RX buffer

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Using dynamic TX/RX buffer. After enabling this option, mbedTLS will allocate TX buffer when need to send data and then free it if all data is sent, allocate RX buffer when need to receive data and then free it when all data is used or read by upper layer.

By default, when SSL is initialized, mbedTLS also allocate TX and RX buffer with the default value of “MBEDTLS_SSL_OUT_CONTENT_LEN” or “MBEDTLS_SSL_IN_CONTENT_LEN”, so to save more heap, users can set the options to be an appropriate value.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_FREE_PEER_CERT

Free SSL peer certificate after its usage

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER

Free peer certificate after its usage in handshake process.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_FREE_CONFIG_DATA

Free private key and DHM data after its usage

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER

Free private key and DHM data after its usage in handshake process.

The option will decrease heap cost when handshake, but also lead to problem:

Becasue all certificate, private key and DHM data are freed so users should register certificate and private key to ssl config object again.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_FREE_CA_CERT

Free SSL CA certificate after its usage

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_BUFFER > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DYNAMIC_FREE_CONFIG_DATA

Free CA certificate after its usage in the handshake process. This option will decrease the heap footprint for the TLS handshake, but may lead to a problem: If the respective ssl object needs to perform the TLS handshake again, the CA certificate should once again be registered to the ssl object.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEBUG

Enable mbedTLS debugging

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable mbedTLS debugging functions at compile time.

If this option is enabled, you can include “mbedtls/esp_debug.h” and call mbedtls_esp_enable_debug_log() at runtime in order to enable mbedTLS debug output via the ESP log mechanism.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL

Set mbedTLS debugging level

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEBUG

Set mbedTLS debugging level

Available options:

  • Warning (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_WARN)

  • Info (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_INFO)

  • Debug (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_DEBUG)

  • Verbose (MBEDTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL_VERBOSE)

Certificate Bundle

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Enable trusted root certificate bundle

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle

Enable support for large number of default root certificates

When enabled this option allows user to store default as well as customer specific root certificates in compressed format rather than storing full certificate. For the root certificates the public key and the subject name will be stored.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DEFAULT_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Default certificate bundle options

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Available options:

  • Use the full default certificate bundle (MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_DEFAULT_FULL)

  • Use only the most common certificates from the default bundles (MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_DEFAULT_CMN)

    Use only the most common certificates from the default bundles, reducing the size with 50%, while still having around 99% coverage.

  • Do not use the default certificate bundle (MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_DEFAULT_NONE)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Add custom certificates to the default bundle

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_PATH

Custom certificate bundle path

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CUSTOM_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Name of the custom certificate directory or file. This path is evaluated relative to the project root directory.

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE_MAX_CERTS

Maximum no of certificates allowed in certificate bundle

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificate Bundle > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CERTIFICATE_BUNDLE

Default value:

  • 200

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_RESTARTABLE

Enable mbedTLS ecp restartable

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable “non-blocking” ECC operations that can return early and be resumed.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CMAC_C

Enable CMAC mode for block ciphers

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable the CMAC (Cipher-based Message Authentication Code) mode for block ciphers.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_AES

Enable hardware AES acceleration

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable hardware accelerated AES encryption & decryption.

Note that if the ESP32 CPU is running at 240MHz, hardware AES does not offer any speed boost over software AES.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_MPI

Enable hardware MPI (bignum) acceleration

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable hardware accelerated multiple precision integer operations.

Hardware accelerated multiplication, modulo multiplication, and modular exponentiation for up to SOC_RSA_MAX_BIT_LEN bit results.

These operations are used by RSA.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HARDWARE_SHA

Enable hardware SHA acceleration

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable hardware accelerated SHA1, SHA256, SHA384 & SHA512 in mbedTLS.

Due to a hardware limitation, on the ESP32 hardware acceleration is only guaranteed if SHA digests are calculated one at a time. If more than one SHA digest is calculated at the same time, one will be calculated fully in hardware and the rest will be calculated (at least partially calculated) in software. This happens automatically.

SHA hardware acceleration is faster than software in some situations but slower in others. You should benchmark to find the best setting for you.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if SPIRAM_CACHE_WORKAROUND_STRATEGY_DUPLDST

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ROM_MD5

Use MD5 implementation in ROM

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Use ROM MD5 in mbedTLS.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ATCA_HW_ECDSA_SIGN

Enable hardware ECDSA sign acceleration when using ATECC608A

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

This option enables hardware acceleration for ECDSA sign function, only when using ATECC608A cryptoauth chip (integrated with ESP32-WROOM-32SE)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ATCA_HW_ECDSA_VERIFY

Enable hardware ECDSA verify acceleration when using ATECC608A

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

This option enables hardware acceleration for ECDSA sign function, only when using ATECC608A cryptoauth chip (integrated with ESP32-WROOM-32SE)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME

Enable mbedtls time support

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable use of time.h functions (time() and gmtime()) by mbedTLS.

This option doesn’t require the system time to be correct, but enables functionality that requires relative timekeeping - for example periodic expiry of TLS session tickets or session cache entries.

Disabling this option will save some firmware size, particularly if the rest of the firmware doesn’t call any standard timekeeeping functions.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME_DATE

Enable mbedtls certificate expiry check

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HAVE_TIME

Enables X.509 certificate expiry checks in mbedTLS.

If this option is disabled (default) then X.509 certificate “valid from” and “valid to” timestamp fields are ignored.

If this option is enabled, these fields are compared with the current system date and time. The time is retrieved using the standard time() and gmtime() functions. If the certificate is not valid for the current system time then verification will fail with code MBEDTLS_X509_BADCERT_FUTURE or MBEDTLS_X509_BADCERT_EXPIRED.

Enabling this option requires adding functionality in the firmware to set the system clock to a valid timestamp before using TLS. The recommended way to do this is via ESP-IDF’s SNTP functionality, but any method can be used.

In the case where only a small number of certificates are trusted by the device, please carefully consider the tradeoffs of enabling this option. There may be undesired consequences, for example if all trusted certificates expire while the device is offline and a TLS connection is required to update. Or if an issue with the SNTP server means that the system time is invalid for an extended period after a reset.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDSA_DETERMINISTIC

Enable deterministic ECDSA

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Standard ECDSA is “fragile” in the sense that lack of entropy when signing may result in a compromise of the long-term signing key.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SHA512_C

Enable the SHA-384 and SHA-512 cryptographic hash algorithms

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable MBEDTLS_SHA512_C adds support for SHA-384 and SHA-512.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_TLS_MODE

TLS Protocol Role

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

mbedTLS can be compiled with protocol support for the TLS server, TLS client, or both server and client.

Reducing the number of TLS roles supported saves code size.

Available options:

  • Server & Client (MBEDTLS_TLS_SERVER_AND_CLIENT)

  • Server (MBEDTLS_TLS_SERVER_ONLY)

  • Client (MBEDTLS_TLS_CLIENT_ONLY)

  • None (MBEDTLS_TLS_DISABLED)

TLS Key Exchange Methods

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable pre-shared-key ciphersuites

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to show configuration for different types of pre-shared-key TLS authentatication methods.

Leaving this options disabled will save code size if they are not used.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_PSK

Enable PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support symmetric key PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS key exchange modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_PSK

Enable DHE-PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support Diffie-Hellman PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS authentication modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_PSK

Enable ECDHE-PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support Elliptic-Curve-Diffie-Hellman PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS authentication modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA_PSK

Enable RSA-PSK based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PSK_MODES

Enable to support RSA PSK (pre-shared-key) TLS authentication modes.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_RSA

Enable RSA-only based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_DHE_RSA

Enable DHE-RSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-DHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Support Elliptic Curve based ciphersuites

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to show Elliptic Curve based ciphersuite mode options.

Disabling all Elliptic Curve ciphersuites saves code size and can give slightly faster TLS handshakes, provided the server supports RSA-only ciphersuite modes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_RSA

Enable ECDHE-RSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDHE_ECDSA

Enable ECDHE-ECDSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_ECDSA

Enable ECDH-ECDSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECDH_RSA

Enable ECDH-RSA based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ELLIPTIC_CURVE

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECDHE-RSA-WITH-

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_KEY_EXCHANGE_ECJPAKE

Enable ECJPAKE based ciphersuite modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > TLS Key Exchange Methods

Enable to support ciphersuites with prefix TLS-ECJPAKE-WITH-

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_RENEGOTIATION

Support TLS renegotiation

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

The two main uses of renegotiation are (1) refresh keys on long-lived connections and (2) client authentication after the initial handshake. If you don’t need renegotiation, disabling it will save code size and reduce the possibility of abuse/vulnerability.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_SSL3

Legacy SSL 3.0 support

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Support the legacy SSL 3.0 protocol. Most servers will speak a newer TLS protocol these days.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1

Support TLS 1.0 protocol

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_1

Support TLS 1.1 protocol

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_TLS1_2

Support TLS 1.2 protocol

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_PROTO_DTLS

Support DTLS protocol (all versions)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Requires TLS 1.1 to be enabled for DTLS 1.0 Requires TLS 1.2 to be enabled for DTLS 1.2

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SSL_ALPN

Support ALPN (Application Layer Protocol Negotiation)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Disabling this option will save some code size if it is not needed.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CLIENT_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS

TLS: Client Support for RFC 5077 SSL session tickets

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Client support for RFC 5077 session tickets. See mbedTLS documentation for more details. Disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_X509_CHECK_KEY_USAGE

Enable verification of the keyUsage extension

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Disabling this avoids problems with mis-issued and/or misused (intermediate) CA and leaf certificates. Depending on your PKI use, disabling this can be a security risk.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_X509_CHECK_EXTENDED_KEY_USAGE

Enable verification of the extendedKeyUsage extension

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Disabling this avoids problems with mis-issued and/or misused certificates. Depending on your PKI use, disabling this can be a security risk.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SERVER_SSL_SESSION_TICKETS

TLS: Server Support for RFC 5077 SSL session tickets

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Server support for RFC 5077 session tickets. See mbedTLS documentation for more details. Disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Symmetric Ciphers

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_AES_C

AES block cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CAMELLIA_C

Camellia block cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_DES_C

DES block cipher (legacy, insecure)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enables the DES block cipher to support 3DES-based TLS ciphersuites.

3DES is vulnerable to the Sweet32 attack and should only be enabled if absolutely necessary.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_RC4_MODE

RC4 Stream Cipher (legacy, insecure)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

ARCFOUR (RC4) stream cipher can be disabled entirely, enabled but not added to default ciphersuites, or enabled completely.

Please consider the security implications before enabling RC4.

Available options:

  • Disabled (MBEDTLS_RC4_DISABLED)

  • Enabled, not in default ciphersuites (MBEDTLS_RC4_ENABLED_NO_DEFAULT)

  • Enabled (MBEDTLS_RC4_ENABLED)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_BLOWFISH_C

Blowfish block cipher (read help)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enables the Blowfish block cipher (not used for TLS sessions.)

The Blowfish cipher is not used for mbedTLS TLS sessions but can be used for other purposes. Read up on the limitations of Blowfish (including Sweet32) before enabling.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_XTEA_C

XTEA block cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enables the XTEA block cipher.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CCM_C

CCM (Counter with CBC-MAC) block cipher modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enable Counter with CBC-MAC (CCM) modes for AES and/or Camellia ciphers.

Disabling this option saves some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_GCM_C

GCM (Galois/Counter) block cipher modes

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enable Galois/Counter Mode for AES and/or Camellia ciphers.

This option is generally faster than CCM.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_NIST_KW_C

NIST key wrapping (KW) and KW padding (KWP)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Symmetric Ciphers

Enable NIST key wrapping and key wrapping padding.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_RIPEMD160_C

Enable RIPEMD-160 hash algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable the RIPEMD-160 hash algorithm.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Certificates

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PEM_PARSE_C

Read & Parse PEM formatted certificates

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Enable decoding/parsing of PEM formatted certificates.

If your certificates are all in the simpler DER format, disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_PEM_WRITE_C

Write PEM formatted certificates

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Enable writing of PEM formatted certificates.

If writing certificate data only in DER format, disabling this option will save some code size.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_X509_CRL_PARSE_C

X.509 CRL parsing

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Support for parsing X.509 Certifificate Revocation Lists.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_X509_CSR_PARSE_C

X.509 CSR parsing

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > Certificates

Support for parsing X.509 Certifificate Signing Requests

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Elliptic Curve Ciphers

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDH_C

Elliptic Curve Diffie-Hellman (ECDH)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable ECDH. Needed to use ECDHE-xxx TLS ciphersuites.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDSA_C

Elliptic Curve DSA

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECDH_C

Enable ECDSA. Needed to use ECDSA-xxx TLS ciphersuites.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECJPAKE_C

Elliptic curve J-PAKE

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable ECJPAKE. Needed to use ECJPAKE-xxx TLS ciphersuites.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP192R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP192R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP192R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP224R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP224R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP224R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP256R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP256R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP256R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP384R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP384R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP384R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP521R1_ENABLED

Enable SECP521R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP521R1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP192K1_ENABLED

Enable SECP192K1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP192K1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP224K1_ENABLED

Enable SECP224K1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP224K1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_SECP256K1_ENABLED

Enable SECP256K1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for SECP256K1 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_BP256R1_ENABLED

Enable BP256R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

support for DP Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_BP384R1_ENABLED

Enable BP384R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

support for DP Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_BP512R1_ENABLED

Enable BP512R1 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

support for DP Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_DP_CURVE25519_ENABLED

Enable CURVE25519 curve

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

Enable support for CURVE25519 Elliptic Curve.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_NIST_OPTIM

NIST ‘modulo p’ optimisations

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ECP_C

NIST ‘modulo p’ optimisations increase Elliptic Curve operation performance.

Disabling this option saves some code size.

# end of Elliptic Curve options

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_POLY1305_C

Poly1305 MAC algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for Poly1305 MAC algorithm.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CHACHA20_C

Chacha20 stream cipher

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for Chacha20 stream cipher.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CHACHAPOLY_C

ChaCha20-Poly1305 AEAD algorithm

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_CHACHA20_C

Enable support for ChaCha20-Poly1305 AEAD algorithm.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_HKDF_C

HKDF algorithm (RFC 5869)

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Enable support for the Hashed Message Authentication Code (HMAC)-based key derivation function (HKDF).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_C

Enable the threading abstraction layer

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

If you do intend to use contexts between threads, you will need to enable this layer to prevent race conditions.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_ALT

Enable threading alternate implementation

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_C

Enable threading alt to allow your own alternate threading implementation.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_PTHREAD

Enable threading pthread implementation

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_THREADING_C

Enable the pthread wrapper layer for the threading layer.

Default value:
CONFIG_MBEDTLS_LARGE_KEY_SOFTWARE_MPI

Fallback to software implementation for larger MPI values

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Fallback to software implementation for RSA key lengths larger than SOC_RSA_MAX_BIT_LEN. If this is not active then the ESP will be unable to process keys greater than SOC_RSA_MAX_BIT_LEN.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SECURITY_RISKS

Show configurations with potential security risks

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Contains:

CONFIG_MBEDTLS_ALLOW_UNSUPPORTED_CRITICAL_EXT

X.509 CRT parsing with unsupported critical extensions

Found in: Component config > mbedTLS > CONFIG_MBEDTLS_SECURITY_RISKS

Allow the X.509 certificate parser to load certificates with unsupported critical extensions

Default value:

mDNS

Contains:

CONFIG_MDNS_MAX_SERVICES

Max number of services

Found in: Component config > mDNS

Services take up a certain amount of memory, and allowing fewer services to be open at the same time conserves memory. Specify the maximum amount of services here. The valid value is from 1 to 64.

Range:

  • from 1 to 64

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_MDNS_TASK_PRIORITY

mDNS task priority

Found in: Component config > mDNS

Allows setting mDNS task priority. Please do not set the task priority higher than priorities of system tasks. Compile time warning/error would be emitted if the chosen task priority were too high.

Range:

  • from 1 to 255

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_MDNS_TASK_STACK_SIZE

mDNS task stack size

Found in: Component config > mDNS

Allows setting mDNS task stacksize.

Default value:

  • 4096

CONFIG_MDNS_TASK_AFFINITY

mDNS task affinity

Found in: Component config > mDNS

Allows setting mDNS tasks affinity, i.e. whether the task is pinned to CPU0, pinned to CPU1, or allowed to run on any CPU.

Available options:

  • No affinity (MDNS_TASK_AFFINITY_NO_AFFINITY)

  • CPU0 (MDNS_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU0)

  • CPU1 (MDNS_TASK_AFFINITY_CPU1)

CONFIG_MDNS_SERVICE_ADD_TIMEOUT_MS

mDNS adding service timeout (ms)

Found in: Component config > mDNS

Configures timeout for adding a new mDNS service. Adding a service fails if could not be completed within this time.

Range:

  • from 10 to 30000

Default value:

  • 2000

CONFIG_MDNS_STRICT_MODE

mDNS strict mode

Found in: Component config > mDNS

Configures strict mode. Set this to 1 for the mDNS library to strictly follow the RFC6762: Currently the only strict feature: Do not repeat original questions in response packets (defined in RFC6762 sec. 6). Default configuration is 0, i.e. non-strict mode, since some implementations, such as lwIP mdns resolver (used by standard POSIX API like getaddrinfo, gethostbyname) could not correctly resolve advertised names.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MDNS_TIMER_PERIOD_MS

mDNS timer period (ms)

Found in: Component config > mDNS

Configures period of mDNS timer, which periodically transmits packets and schedules mDNS searches.

Range:

  • from 10 to 10000

Default value:

  • 100

ESP-MQTT Configurations

Contains:

CONFIG_MQTT_PROTOCOL_311

Enable MQTT protocol 3.1.1

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

If not, this library will use MQTT protocol 3.1

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_SSL

Enable MQTT over SSL

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Enable MQTT transport over SSL with mbedtls

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_WEBSOCKET

Enable MQTT over Websocket

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Enable MQTT transport over Websocket.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_WEBSOCKET_SECURE

Enable MQTT over Websocket Secure

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_TRANSPORT_WEBSOCKET

Enable MQTT transport over Websocket Secure.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_MSG_ID_INCREMENTAL

Use Incremental Message Id

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set this to true for the message id (2.3.1 Packet Identifier) to be generated as an incremental number rather then a random value (used by default)

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_SKIP_PUBLISH_IF_DISCONNECTED

Skip publish if disconnected

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set this to true to avoid publishing (enqueueing messages) if the client is disconnected. The MQTT client tries to publish all messages by default, even in the disconnected state (where the qos1 and qos2 packets are stored in the internal outbox to be published later) The MQTT_SKIP_PUBLISH_IF_DISCONNECTED option allows applications to override this behaviour and not enqueue publish packets in the disconnected state.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_REPORT_DELETED_MESSAGES

Report deleted messages

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set this to true to post events for all messages which were deleted from the outbox before being correctly sent and confirmed.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

MQTT Using custom configurations

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Custom MQTT configurations.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_TCP_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over TCP port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over TCP port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_SSL_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over SSL port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over SSL port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_WS_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over Websocket port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over Websocket port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_WSS_DEFAULT_PORT

Default MQTT over Websocket Secure port

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default MQTT over Websocket Secure port

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_BUFFER_SIZE

Default MQTT Buffer Size

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

This buffer size using for both transmit and receive

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_STACK_SIZE

MQTT task stack size

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

MQTT task stack size

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_DISABLE_API_LOCKS

Disable API locks

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

Default config employs API locks to protect internal structures. It is possible to disable these locks if the user code doesn’t access MQTT API from multiple concurrent tasks

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_PRIORITY

MQTT task priority

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_USE_CUSTOM_CONFIG

MQTT task priority. Higher number denotes higher priority.

Default value:
CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_CORE_SELECTION_ENABLED

Enable MQTT task core selection

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

This will enable core selection

Default value:

  • “false”

CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_CORE_SELECTION

Core to use ?

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations > CONFIG_MQTT_TASK_CORE_SELECTION_ENABLED

Available options:

  • Core 0 (MQTT_USE_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (MQTT_USE_CORE_1)

CONFIG_MQTT_CUSTOM_OUTBOX

Enable custom outbox implementation

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Set to true if a specific implementation of message outbox is needed (e.g. persistant outbox in NVM or similar).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_MQTT_OUTBOX_EXPIRED_TIMEOUT_MS

Outbox message expired timeout[ms]

Found in: Component config > ESP-MQTT Configurations

Messages which stays in the outbox longer than this value before being published will be discarded.

Default value:

Newlib

Contains:

CONFIG_NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING

Line ending for UART output

Found in: Component config > Newlib

This option allows configuring the desired line endings sent to UART when a newline (‘n’, LF) appears on stdout. Three options are possible:

CRLF: whenever LF is encountered, prepend it with CR

LF: no modification is applied, stdout is sent as is

CR: each occurence of LF is replaced with CR

This option doesn’t affect behavior of the UART driver (drivers/uart.h).

Available options:

  • CRLF (NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING_CRLF)

  • LF (NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING_LF)

  • CR (NEWLIB_STDOUT_LINE_ENDING_CR)

CONFIG_NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING

Line ending for UART input

Found in: Component config > Newlib

This option allows configuring which input sequence on UART produces a newline (‘n’, LF) on stdin. Three options are possible:

CRLF: CRLF is converted to LF

LF: no modification is applied, input is sent to stdin as is

CR: each occurence of CR is replaced with LF

This option doesn’t affect behavior of the UART driver (drivers/uart.h).

Available options:

  • CRLF (NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING_CRLF)

  • LF (NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING_LF)

  • CR (NEWLIB_STDIN_LINE_ENDING_CR)

CONFIG_NEWLIB_NANO_FORMAT

Enable ‘nano’ formatting options for printf/scanf family

Found in: Component config > Newlib

ESP32 ROM contains parts of newlib C library, including printf/scanf family of functions. These functions have been compiled with so-called “nano” formatting option. This option doesn’t support 64-bit integer formats and C99 features, such as positional arguments.

For more details about “nano” formatting option, please see newlib readme file, search for ‘–enable-newlib-nano-formatted-io’: https://sourceware.org/newlib/README

If this option is enabled, build system will use functions available in ROM, reducing the application binary size. Functions available in ROM run faster than functions which run from flash. Functions available in ROM can also run when flash instruction cache is disabled.

If you need 64-bit integer formatting support or C99 features, keep this option disabled.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

NVS

Contains:

CONFIG_NVS_ENCRYPTION

Enable NVS encryption

Found in: Component config > NVS

This option enables encryption for NVS. When enabled, AES-XTS is used to encrypt the complete NVS data, except the page headers. It requires XTS encryption keys to be stored in an encrypted partition. This means enabling flash encryption is a pre-requisite for this feature.

Default value:
CONFIG_NVS_COMPATIBLE_PRE_V4_3_ENCRYPTION_FLAG

NVS partition encrypted flag compatible with ESP-IDF before v4.3

Found in: Component config > NVS

Enabling this will ignore “encrypted” flag for NVS partitions. NVS encryption scheme is different than hardware flash encryption and hence it is not recommended to have “encrypted” flag for NVS partitions. This was not being checked in pre v4.3 IDF. Hence, if you have any devices where this flag is kept enabled in partition table then enabling this config will allow to have same behavior as pre v4.3 IDF.

OpenSSL

Contains:

CONFIG_OPENSSL_DEBUG

Enable OpenSSL debugging

Found in: Component config > OpenSSL

Enable OpenSSL debugging function.

If the option is enabled, “SSL_DEBUG” works.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_OPENSSL_ERROR_STACK

Enable OpenSSL error structure

Found in: Component config > OpenSSL

Enable OpenSSL Error reporting

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_OPENSSL_DEBUG_LEVEL

OpenSSL debugging level

Found in: Component config > OpenSSL

OpenSSL debugging level.

Only function whose debugging level is higher than “OPENSSL_DEBUG_LEVEL” works.

For example: If OPENSSL_DEBUG_LEVEL = 2, you use function “SSL_DEBUG(1, “malloc failed”)”. Because 1 < 2, it will not print.

Range:
Default value:
CONFIG_OPENSSL_LOWLEVEL_DEBUG

Enable OpenSSL low-level module debugging

Found in: Component config > OpenSSL

If the option is enabled, low-level module debugging function of OpenSSL is enabled, e.g. mbedtls internal debugging function.

Default value:
CONFIG_OPENSSL_ASSERT

Select OpenSSL assert function

Found in: Component config > OpenSSL

OpenSSL function needs “assert” function to check if input parameters are valid.

If you want to use assert debugging function, “OPENSSL_DEBUG” should be enabled.

Available options:

  • Do nothing (OPENSSL_ASSERT_DO_NOTHING)

    Do nothing and “SSL_ASSERT” does not work.

  • Check and exit (OPENSSL_ASSERT_EXIT)

    Enable assert exiting, it will check and return error code.

  • Show debugging message (OPENSSL_ASSERT_DEBUG)

    Enable assert debugging, it will check and show debugging message.

  • Show debugging message and exit (OPENSSL_ASSERT_DEBUG_EXIT)

    Enable assert debugging and exiting, it will check, show debugging message and return error code.

  • Show debugging message and block (OPENSSL_ASSERT_DEBUG_BLOCK)

    Enable assert debugging and blocking, it will check, show debugging message and block by “while (1);”.

PThreads

Contains:

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_PRIO_DEFAULT

Default task priority

Found in: Component config > PThreads

Priority used to create new tasks with default pthread parameters.

Range:

  • from 0 to 255

Default value:

  • 5

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_STACK_SIZE_DEFAULT

Default task stack size

Found in: Component config > PThreads

Stack size used to create new tasks with default pthread parameters.

Default value:

  • 3072

CONFIG_PTHREAD_STACK_MIN

Minimum allowed pthread stack size

Found in: Component config > PThreads

Minimum allowed pthread stack size set in attributes passed to pthread_create

Default value:

  • 768

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_CORE_DEFAULT

Default pthread core affinity

Found in: Component config > PThreads

The default core to which pthreads are pinned.

Available options:

  • No affinity (PTHREAD_DEFAULT_CORE_NO_AFFINITY)

  • Core 0 (PTHREAD_DEFAULT_CORE_0)

  • Core 1 (PTHREAD_DEFAULT_CORE_1)

CONFIG_PTHREAD_TASK_NAME_DEFAULT

Default name of pthreads

Found in: Component config > PThreads

The default name of pthreads.

Default value:

  • “pthread”

SPI Flash driver

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_VERIFY_WRITE

Verify SPI flash writes

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

If this option is enabled, any time SPI flash is written then the data will be read back and verified. This can catch hardware problems with SPI flash, or flash which was not erased before verification.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_LOG_FAILED_WRITE

Log errors if verification fails

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_VERIFY_WRITE

If this option is enabled, if SPI flash write verification fails then a log error line will be written with the address, expected & actual values. This can be useful when debugging hardware SPI flash problems.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_WARN_SETTING_ZERO_TO_ONE

Log warning if writing zero bits to ones

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_VERIFY_WRITE

If this option is enabled, any SPI flash write which tries to set zero bits in the flash to ones will log a warning. Such writes will not result in the requested data appearing identically in flash once written, as SPI NOR flash can only set bits to one when an entire sector is erased. After erasing, individual bits can only be written from one to zero.

Note that some software (such as SPIFFS) which is aware of SPI NOR flash may write one bits as an optimisation, relying on the data in flash becoming a bitwise AND of the new data and any existing data. Such software will log spurious warnings if this option is enabled.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ENABLE_COUNTERS

Enable operation counters

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This option enables the following APIs:

  • spi_flash_reset_counters

  • spi_flash_dump_counters

  • spi_flash_get_counters

These APIs may be used to collect performance data for spi_flash APIs and to help understand behaviour of libraries which use SPI flash.

Default value:

  • 0

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ROM_DRIVER_PATCH

Enable SPI flash ROM driver patched functions

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Enable this flag to use patched versions of SPI flash ROM driver functions. This option should be enabled, if any one of the following is true: (1) need to write to flash on ESP32-D2WD; (2) main SPI flash is connected to non-default pins; (3) main SPI flash chip is manufactured by ISSI.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE

Writing to dangerous flash regions

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

SPI flash APIs can optionally abort or return a failure code if erasing or writing addresses that fall at the beginning of flash (covering the bootloader and partition table) or that overlap the app partition that contains the running app.

It is not recommended to ever write to these regions from an IDF app, and this check prevents logic errors or corrupted firmware memory from damaging these regions.

Note that this feature *does not* check calls to the esp_rom_xxx SPI flash ROM functions. These functions should not be called directly from IDF applications.

Available options:

  • Aborts (SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE_ABORTS)

  • Fails (SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE_FAILS)

  • Allowed (SPI_FLASH_DANGEROUS_WRITE_ALLOWED)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_USE_LEGACY_IMPL

Use the legacy implementation before IDF v4.0

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

The implementation of SPI flash has been greatly changed in IDF v4.0. Enable this option to use the legacy implementation.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SHARE_SPI1_BUS

Support other devices attached to SPI1 bus

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Each SPI bus needs a lock for arbitration among devices. This allows multiple devices on a same bus, but may reduce the speed of esp_flash driver access to the main flash chip.

If you only need to use esp_flash driver to access the main flash chip, disable this option, and the lock will be bypassed on SPI1 bus. Otherwise if extra devices are needed to attach to SPI1 bus, enable this option.

Default value:
CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_BYPASS_BLOCK_ERASE

Bypass a block erase and always do sector erase

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Some flash chips can have very high “max” erase times, especially for block erase (32KB or 64KB). This option allows to bypass “block erase” and always do sector erase commands. This will be much slower overall in most cases, but improves latency for other code to run.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_YIELD_DURING_ERASE

Enables yield operation during flash erase

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This allows to yield the CPUs between erase commands. Prevents starvation of other tasks.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ERASE_YIELD_DURATION_MS

Duration of erasing to yield CPUs (ms)

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_YIELD_DURING_ERASE

If a duration of one erase command is large then it will yield CPUs after finishing a current command.

Default value:

  • 20

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ERASE_YIELD_TICKS

CPU release time (tick) for an erase operation

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_YIELD_DURING_ERASE

Defines how many ticks will be before returning to continue a erasing.

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_WRITE_CHUNK_SIZE

Flash write chunk size

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

Flash write is broken down in terms of multiple (smaller) write operations. This configuration options helps to set individual write chunk size, smaller value here ensures that cache (and non-IRAM resident interrupts) remains disabled for shorter duration.

Range:

  • from 256 to 8192

Default value:

  • 8192

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SIZE_OVERRIDE

Override flash size in bootloader header by ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

SPI Flash driver uses the flash size configured in bootloader header by default. Enable this option to override flash size with latest ESPTOOLPY_FLASHSIZE value from the app header if the size in the bootloader header is incorrect.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_CHECK_ERASE_TIMEOUT_DISABLED

Flash timeout checkout disabled

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This option is helpful if you are using a flash chip whose timeout is quite large or unpredictable.

Default value:
Auto-detect flash chips

Contains:

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_ISSI_CHIP

ISSI

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of ISSI chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_MXIC_CHIP

MXIC

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of MXIC chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_GD_CHIP

GigaDevice

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of GD (GigaDevice) chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. If you are using Wrover modules, please don’t disable this, otherwise your flash may not work in 4-bit mode.

This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time and image size. Note that the default chip driver supports the GD chips with product ID 60H.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_WINBOND_CHIP

Winbond

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of Winbond chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_BOYA_CHIP

BOYA

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of BOYA chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_SUPPORT_TH_CHIP

TH

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver > Auto-detect flash chips

Enable this to support auto detection of TH chips if chip vendor not directly given by chip\_drv member of the chip struct. This adds support for variant chips, however will extend detecting time.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPI_FLASH_ENABLE_ENCRYPTED_READ_WRITE

Enable encrypted partition read/write operations

Found in: Component config > SPI Flash driver

This option enables flash read/write operations to encrypted partition/s. This option is kept enabled irrespective of state of flash encryption feature. However, in case application is not using flash encryption feature and is in need of some additional memory from IRAM region (~1KB) then this config can be disabled.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

SPIFFS Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIFFS_MAX_PARTITIONS

Maximum Number of Partitions

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Define maximum number of partitions that can be mounted.

Range:

  • from 1 to 10

Default value:

  • 3

SPIFFS Cache Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE

Enable SPIFFS Cache

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > SPIFFS Cache Configuration

Enables/disable memory read caching of nucleus file system operations.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE_WR

Enable SPIFFS Write Caching

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > SPIFFS Cache Configuration > CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE

Enables memory write caching for file descriptors in hydrogen.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE_STATS

Enable SPIFFS Cache Statistics

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > SPIFFS Cache Configuration > CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE

Enable/disable statistics on caching. Debug/test purpose only.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_PAGE_CHECK

Enable SPIFFS Page Check

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Always check header of each accessed page to ensure consistent state. If enabled it will increase number of reads from flash, especially if cache is disabled.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_GC_MAX_RUNS

Set Maximum GC Runs

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Define maximum number of GC runs to perform to reach desired free pages.

Range:

  • from 1 to 255

Default value:

  • 10

CONFIG_SPIFFS_GC_STATS

Enable SPIFFS GC Statistics

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Enable/disable statistics on gc. Debug/test purpose only.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_PAGE_SIZE

SPIFFS logical page size

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Logical page size of SPIFFS partition, in bytes. Must be multiple of flash page size (which is usually 256 bytes). Larger page sizes reduce overhead when storing large files, and improve filesystem performance when reading large files. Smaller page sizes reduce overhead when storing small (< page size) files.

Range:

  • from 256 to 1024

Default value:

  • 256

CONFIG_SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN

Set SPIFFS Maximum Name Length

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Object name maximum length. Note that this length include the zero-termination character, meaning maximum string of characters can at most be SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN - 1.

SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN + SPIFFS_META_LENGTH should not exceed SPIFFS_PAGE_SIZE - 64.

Range:

  • from 1 to 256

Default value:

  • 32

CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MAGIC

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Magic

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

Enable this to have an identifiable spiffs filesystem. This will look for a magic in all sectors to determine if this is a valid spiffs system or not at mount time.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MAGIC_LENGTH

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Length Magic

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MAGIC

If this option is enabled, the magic will also be dependent on the length of the filesystem. For example, a filesystem configured and formatted for 4 megabytes will not be accepted for mounting with a configuration defining the filesystem as 2 megabytes.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_META_LENGTH

Size of per-file metadata field

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

This option sets the number of extra bytes stored in the file header. These bytes can be used in an application-specific manner. Set this to at least 4 bytes to enable support for saving file modification time.

SPIFFS_OBJ_NAME_LEN + SPIFFS_META_LENGTH should not exceed SPIFFS_PAGE_SIZE - 64.

Default value:

  • 4

CONFIG_SPIFFS_USE_MTIME

Save file modification time

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

If enabled, then the first 4 bytes of per-file metadata will be used to store file modification time (mtime), accessible through stat/fstat functions. Modification time is updated when the file is opened.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_MTIME_WIDE_64_BITS

The time field occupies 64 bits in the image instead of 32 bits

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration

If this option is not set, the time field is 32 bits (up to 2106 year), otherwise it is 64 bits and make sure it matches SPIFFS_META_LENGTH. If the chip already has the spiffs image with the time field = 32 bits then this option cannot be applied in this case. Erase it first before using this option. To resolve the Y2K38 problem for the spiffs, use a toolchain with support time_t 64 bits (see SDK_TOOLCHAIN_SUPPORTS_TIME_WIDE_64_BITS).

Default value:
Debug Configuration

Contains:

CONFIG_SPIFFS_DBG

Enable general SPIFFS debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print general debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_API_DBG

Enable SPIFFS API debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print API debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_GC_DBG

Enable SPIFFS Garbage Cleaner debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print GC debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CACHE_DBG

Enable SPIFFS Cache debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print cache debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_CHECK_DBG

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Check debug

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enabling this option will print Filesystem Check debug mesages to the console.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_SPIFFS_TEST_VISUALISATION

Enable SPIFFS Filesystem Visualization

Found in: Component config > SPIFFS Configuration > Debug Configuration

Enable this option to enable SPIFFS_vis function in the API.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

TCP Transport

Contains:

Websocket

Contains:

CONFIG_WS_TRANSPORT

Enable Websocket Transport

Found in: Component config > TCP Transport > Websocket

Enable support for creating websocket transport.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_WS_BUFFER_SIZE

Websocket transport buffer size

Found in: Component config > TCP Transport > Websocket > CONFIG_WS_TRANSPORT

Size of the buffer used for constructing the HTTP Upgrade request during connect

Default value:

  • 1024

TinyUSB

Unity unit testing library

Contains:

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_FLOAT

Support for float type

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If not set, assertions on float arguments will not be available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_DOUBLE

Support for double type

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If not set, assertions on double arguments will not be available.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_COLOR

Colorize test output

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, Unity will colorize test results using console escape sequences.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_IDF_TEST_RUNNER

Include ESP-IDF test registration/running helpers

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, then the following features will be available:

  • TEST_CASE macro which performs automatic registration of test functions

  • Functions to run registered test functions: unity_run_all_tests, unity_run_tests_with_filter, unity_run_single_test_by_name.

  • Interactive menu which lists test cases and allows choosing the tests to be run, available via unity_run_menu function.

Disable if a different test registration mechanism is used.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_FIXTURE

Include Unity test fixture

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, unity_fixture.h header file and associated source files are part of the build. These provide an optional set of macros and functions to implement test groups.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_UNITY_ENABLE_BACKTRACE_ON_FAIL

Print a backtrace when a unit test fails

Found in: Component config > Unity unit testing library

If set, the unity framework will print the backtrace information before jumping back to the test menu. The jumping is usually occurs in assert functions such as TEST_ASSERT, TEST_FAIL etc.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Virtual file system

Contains:

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

Provide basic I/O functions

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system

If enabled, the following functions are provided by the VFS component.

open, close, read, write, pread, pwrite, lseek, fstat, fsync, ioctl, fcntl

Filesystem drivers can then be registered to handle these functions for specific paths.

Disabling this option can save memory when the support for these functions is not required.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_DIR

Provide directory related functions

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

If enabled, the following functions are provided by the VFS component.

stat, link, unlink, rename, utime, access, truncate, rmdir, mkdir, opendir, closedir, readdir, readdir_r, seekdir, telldir, rewinddir

Filesystem drivers can then be registered to handle these functions for specific paths.

Disabling this option can save memory when the support for these functions is not required.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_SELECT

Provide select function

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

If enabled, select function is provided by the VFS component, and can be used on peripheral file descriptors (such as UART) and sockets at the same time.

If disabled, the default select implementation will be provided by LWIP for sockets only.

Disabling this option can reduce code size if support for “select” on UART file descriptors is not required.

Default value:
CONFIG_VFS_SUPPRESS_SELECT_DEBUG_OUTPUT

Suppress select() related debug outputs

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_SELECT

Select() related functions might produce an unconveniently lot of debug outputs when one sets the default log level to DEBUG or higher. It is possible to suppress these debug outputs by enabling this option.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_TERMIOS

Provide termios.h functions

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO

Disabling this option can save memory when the support for termios.h is not required.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_VFS_SEMIHOSTFS_MAX_MOUNT_POINTS

Host FS: Maximum number of the host filesystem mount points

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO > Host File System I/O (Semihosting)

Define maximum number of host filesystem mount points.

Default value:

  • 1

CONFIG_VFS_SEMIHOSTFS_HOST_PATH_MAX_LEN

Host FS: Maximum path length for the host base directory

Found in: Component config > Virtual file system > CONFIG_VFS_SUPPORT_IO > Host File System I/O (Semihosting)

Define maximum path length for the host base directory which is to be mounted. If host path passed to esp_vfs_semihost_register() is longer than this value it will be truncated.

Default value:

  • 128

Wear Levelling

Contains:

CONFIG_WL_SECTOR_SIZE

Wear Levelling library sector size

Found in: Component config > Wear Levelling

Sector size used by wear levelling library. You can set default sector size or size that will fit to the flash device sector size.

With sector size set to 4096 bytes, wear levelling library is more efficient. However if FAT filesystem is used on top of wear levelling library, it will need more temporary storage: 4096 bytes for each mounted filesystem and 4096 bytes for each opened file.

With sector size set to 512 bytes, wear levelling library will perform more operations with flash memory, but less RAM will be used by FAT filesystem library (512 bytes for the filesystem and 512 bytes for each file opened).

Available options:

  • 512 (WL_SECTOR_SIZE_512)

  • 4096 (WL_SECTOR_SIZE_4096)

CONFIG_WL_SECTOR_MODE

Sector store mode

Found in: Component config > Wear Levelling

Specify the mode to store data into flash:

  • In Performance mode a data will be stored to the RAM and then stored back to the flash. Compared to the Safety mode, this operation is faster, but if power will be lost when erase sector operation is in progress, then the data from complete flash device sector will be lost.

  • In Safety mode data from complete flash device sector will be read from flash, modified, and then stored back to flash. Compared to the Performance mode, this operation is slower, but if power is lost during erase sector operation, then the data from full flash device sector will not be lost.

Available options:

  • Perfomance (WL_SECTOR_MODE_PERF)

  • Safety (WL_SECTOR_MODE_SAFE)

Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Contains:

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_SCAN_MAX_ENTRIES

Max Wi-Fi Scan Result Entries

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

This sets the maximum number of entries of Wi-Fi scan results that will be kept by the provisioning manager

Range:

  • from 1 to 255

Default value:

  • 16

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_AUTOSTOP_TIMEOUT

Provisioning auto-stop timeout

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Time (in seconds) after which the Wi-Fi provisioning manager will auto-stop after connecting to a Wi-Fi network successfully.

Range:

  • from 5 to 600

Default value:

  • 30

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_BLE_BONDING

Enable BLE bonding

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

This option is applicable only when provisioning transport is BLE.

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_BLE_SEC_CONN

Enable BLE Secure connection flag

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Used to enable Secure connection support when provisioning transport is BLE.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled) if BT_NIMBLE_ENABLED

CONFIG_WIFI_PROV_BLE_FORCE_ENCRYPTION

Force Link Encryption during characteristic Read / Write

Found in: Component config > Wi-Fi Provisioning Manager

Used to enforce link encryption when attempting to read / write characteristic

Supplicant

Contains:

CONFIG_WPA_MBEDTLS_CRYPTO

Use MbedTLS crypto APIs

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to use MbedTLS crypto APIs which utilize hardware acceleration.

Default value:

  • Yes (enabled)

CONFIG_WPA_WAPI_PSK

Enable WAPI PSK support

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable WAPI-PSK which is a Chinese National Standard Encryption for Wireless LANs (GB 15629.11-2003).

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_DEBUG_PRINT

Print debug messages from WPA Supplicant

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to print logging information from WPA supplicant, this includes handshake information and key hex dumps depending on the project logging level.

Enabling this could increase the build size ~60kb depending on the project logging level.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_TESTING_OPTIONS

Add DPP testing code

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this to enable unity test for DPP.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_WPS_STRICT

Strictly validate all WPS attributes

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable validate each WPS attribute rigorously. Disabling this add the workaorunds with various APs. Enabling this may cause inter operability issues with some APs.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_11KV_SUPPORT

Enable 802.11k, 802.11v APIs handling

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable 802.11k 802.11v APIs(RRM and BTM support). Only APIs which are helpful for network assisted roaming are supported for now. Enable this option with BTM and RRM enabled in sta config to make device ready for network assisted roaming. BTM: BSS transition management enables an AP to request a station to transition to a specific AP, or to indicate to a station a set of preferred APs. RRM: Radio measurements enable STAs to understand the radio environment, it enables STAs to observe and gather data on radio link performance and on the radio environment. Current implementation adds beacon report, link measurement, neighbor report.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

CONFIG_WPA_SCAN_CACHE

Keep scan results in cache

Found in: Component config > Supplicant > CONFIG_WPA_11KV_SUPPORT

Keep scan results in cache, if not enabled, those will be flushed immediately.

Default value:
CONFIG_WPA_DPP_SUPPORT

Enable DPP support

Found in: Component config > Supplicant

Select this option to enable WiFi Easy Connect Support.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Compatibility options

Contains:

CONFIG_LEGACY_INCLUDE_COMMON_HEADERS

Include headers across components as before IDF v4.0

Found in: Compatibility options

Soc, esp32, and driver components, the most common components. Some header of these components are included implicitly by headers of other components before IDF v4.0. It’s not required for high-level components, but still included through long header chain everywhere.

This is harmful to the modularity. So it’s changed in IDF v4.0.

You can still include these headers in a legacy way until it is totally deprecated by enable this option.

Default value:

  • No (disabled)

Deprecated options and their replacements

Customisations

Because IDF builds by default with 警告未定义的变量, when the Kconfig tool generates Makefiles (the auto.conf file) its behaviour has been customised. In normal Kconfig, a variable which is set to “no” is undefined. In IDF’s version of Kconfig, this variable is defined in the Makefile but has an empty value.

(Note that ifdef and ifndef can still be used in Makefiles, because they test if a variable is defined and has a non-empty value.)

When generating header files for C & C++, the behaviour is not customised - so #ifdef can be used to test if a boolean config item is set or not.

提供有关此文档的反馈